Home

Roland RD-700 User's Manual

1. 00 1A 0000 aaaa 00 07 0000 000a Foot Controllerl Switch 0 1 0000 bbbb OFF O 0000 cccc 00 08 0000 000a Foot Controller2 Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 7 12768 52768 OFF O 20000 20000 00 09 0000 000a Modulation Switch 0 1 00 1E 0000 aaaa OFF O 0000 bbbb 00 OA 0000 000a Bender Switch 0 1 0000 cccc OFF O 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 8 12768 52768 00 OB 0000 000a Control Switch 0 1 20000 20000 OFF O 00 22 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 00 OC 0000 aaaa Transmit Channel 0 15 0000 cccc 1 16 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 9 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 OD 0000 000a Transmit Bank Select Switch 0 1 00 26 0000 aaaa OFF ON 0000 bbbb 00 OF aaa aaaa Transmit Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 0000 cccc 00 OF aaa aaaa Transmit Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 10 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 10 0000 000a Transmit Program Change Switch CO 00 2A 0000 aaaa OFF ON 0000 bbbb 00 11 aaa aaaa Transmit Program Change 0 127 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 11
2. Status 2nd byte 3rd byte Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H wH aes i n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 n vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 mm 11 Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 Initial function is MFX Control Not received when the Rx Bank Select EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Bank Select is OHold 1 Controller number 64 OFF Status 2nd byte 3rd byte The SETUP Rhythms and Tones corresponding to each Bank Select are as follows BnH 40H vvH The SRX series corresponding to each Bank Select are to see the SRX series owner s Daba OH FH ch 1 16 andan vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON o Gee eae TARNE da Not received when the Rx Hold 1 EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Hold 1 is OFF 000 001 128 GM Patch dE E Pete OPortamento Controller number 65 E acc 085 000 001 100 SETUP 001 100 Stat 2 d byt 3 d byt 064 001 One Touch Piano SETUP 001 E s 086 064 001 004 Rhythm Set 200 203 BnH 41H vvH el ee ait ee et ape s er E x n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 066 001 020 T CALV MALLET 040 059 _ I jen a tenes ORGAN Chile 089 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON 068 001 020 Tone STRINGS 090 109 069 001 020 Tone PAD 10 129 070 001 030 Tone GTR BASS 3059 The Port
3. 68 Parameters That Can Be Selassie 68 De LUS QIN CLONES no asas Susu ae eee natn Sas 69 Making System Settings System J 69 How to Make Sete asias 69 Adjusting the Volume Master Olmeda nee 70 Preventing Equalizer Settings from Being Switched EQ Control 70 Retaining the Current Tone Even When Tones Are Switched Tone Remain 70 Changing the Clock Timing Source Clock Source 1 70 Switching Between Reception of GM GM2 System On and GS Reset 70 Using Program Change Messages to Switch Setups Control Channel 70 petting the Device TD Number Device ID austria alta o ii 71 Switebine the Pedal s Polarity Pedal Pola oo 71 Setting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch 71 H w to Make Sets AS AS 71 Changing the Key Touch Key Toge y aaa iii 72 Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset 72 Setting a Constant Volume Level in Response to the Playing Force Velocity 72 Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens 72 Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range Velocity Keyfollow Sens 72 Pedal CONTROL Knob and Equalizer Settings Control EQ
4. 89 DECANO rca 13 33 DELIV ponla did 79 Delay Center usina 79 Delay Defi sandalia 79 Delay RIS Eidos 79 BEMO PEAY arice sn 34 Dest Part Arpeggio meieri aaron 84 Device ID System tana 71 Display Contrast g u ennea raa aiaa EE 28 DMP Damper Switch MIDI TX Part 65 E EDT aN 68 FARMO ceneo Ata ts E te 68 ENTER exa 13 BO Control System 70 EO PEC UE yine rere k ua 67 OCR nd can 67 FPO Meh Preu 74 EO Tow I q sont 74 EFEO Mid Freg sau E N asa 74 AAA A asss a sa 74 O O arado 67 EQ SW Equalizer Switch Piano Edit wo eee eee 67 EQUATCIA SR a ane 48 EQUALIZERTON O PE usais 12 48 EXPANSION A B 13 39 External MIDI Device 59 95 F F T Fine Tune MIDI TX Part 65 Factory Rese Teana n ose 26 94 Factory Reset Aron A S 27 94 Factory Reset C urrente id 94 FC1 ECT Eedal ASS oi aron munasa t 73 FCT Pedal Polarity System 71 FC1 Pedal Switch MIDI TX Part 65 FCI Pedal Sw Local Paris 89 FC2 Je Pedal AS 73 FC2 Pedal Polarity System 71 FC2 Pedal Swtich MIDI TX Part 65 FC2 Pedal Sw Local Part 89 D C on au E uyu eas 75 Fine Tune lone uuu ledit
5. 73 Howto Make Sete ios 73 Assigning Functions to Pedals ECIAECA narrando ciao 73 Changing the CONTROL Knob Settings Control Src ss 74 Changing the Equalizer Frequency Settings Freq O 2 nan 74 Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode 75 Changing the PART LEVEL Slider Feet Assignments Harmonic Barb 76 Setting the Multi Effects Reverb and Chorus Effects MFX Reverb Chorus 76 Howto Make Sets 76 Makine Mult Efecto Seine ZZ Makine Reverb oe is uD E uuu tn aa 78 S IIS Choi and Dela ata 78 Making Tone Settings Tone Edit T 79 Howto Make Settnmes y ida tad 79 selecto the Fart to Be Sere arts LONE still 80 Setting the Reverb Chorus Depth Reverb Chorus Amount ss 80 Changing the Effect Applied to the Lone ME an 80 Playing Sound Monophonically MONO POLY u 80 Changin the Pitch Coarse Fine Uno ui 80 Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento Switch Time ss 81 Chane me Tone blo a salidas 81 Changing the Bend Range Bend kanmeeu uu AS 81 Precise Modification of Chord Sonorities Stretch Tune ss 81 Making the Rhythm Settings Rhythm Pattern 82 How to Make octane S ias 82 Adjustine the Tempo Tenipo arrira SM A haqa AS tes 82 Change Patte n Patter
6. Parameter Value MEMO 1 8 The rhythm will be divid With Clock Source p 70 set to MIDI M appears in the ed in eighth notes display and the RD 700 is synchronized to the tempo of the The rhythm will be divid external MIDI device The tempo cannot be changed with the 1 12 ed in eighth note triplets RD 700 when M is indicated The rhythm will be divid 1 16 ed in 16th notes I Selecting Parts to Play Arpeggios o cas Dest Pa rt ed in 32nd notes This setting selects the part that is to play arpeggios when the PORTAMEN A style using the porta RD 700 is in Split mode or Layer mode p 41 TO A B ente etisct GLISSANDO A glissando style c cC SEQUENCE Styles for sequenced pat UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER Dest Part A D terns ALL MEMO ECHO An echo like style SYNTH BASS When transmitting arpeggio performances from the MIDI HEAVY SLAP Styles appropriate for OUT connector set this to ALL LIGHT SLAP bass playing WALK BASS Setting the Key Range for the e Arpeggio Performa nces 15 Styles 2 5 are effective Key Ra nge when 3 4 notes are held You cannot perform in the normal manner in the range set 3 FINGER GTR Three finger guitar style for arpeggio performances but you can specify the range STRUM GTR Styles for guitar cutting Guitar chords strummed used for the arpeggios which even allows you for example UP STRUM to split the keyboard in
7. 95 REL Release Time MIDI TX Part 64 Release Time Tohe ina 81 RES Resonance MIDI TX Part 64 Resonance TONG ancient soii 81 Restoring the Factory Settings oconconocnncnnonaninnonaninnnnanos 26 REV Reverb MIDI TX Part imita 63 Reverb Reyerb parameters seen aki ns ne 134 Reverb Amount Tone cccooocccnonnoncnnnonanannnonnccnnonanccn nos 80 Reverb Electra 47 Reverb High Cut Frequency u y u indice 78 REVERB KOOD mineira 12 47 Reverb Level Piano Edit 67 Reverb Pr y na 78 Reverb A etre 78 Reverb LPs ce E ts ta 78 RAY Sel tienta a sas 83 ROV SC ECNIN E nara 83 RHYTHM A a R a 51 RAS ETA ic T A seach T 51 Khythta Batteries 0402 Rhy im atte salon 143 PP A A 38 ROVER SETLIST zerea n pak ayat 138 Ry thi Tempo siaaa 52 RASE TP aaa 82 Rivthm Arpegelo Screen uu aaa cis 32 Rotary Effect Tone Wheel Mode 75 Rx GM System ON System ss 70 Rx GM2 System ON System msi is 70 RES Reset Sy Stein eric sasa ais 70 Fb nik Selecta 91 RX Dender acristalada did 91 Fx I Lau una sans oi 91 ReMod uli hOn sandalia pies 91 R RARE E E 91 RYE FOS Fa CHANGE nement 91 Fx Volume uuu uu rer ne ayu say s 91 S SETUP lustros tasas 12 54 SUD peda 54 Calline Up a Setup sicarios 54 Store Settings to Set cdta 56 Setup SCHEIN nent qa aa 92 Snoticut italia 145 Shu
8. 97 MARINE connect 97 DECI the Channels air aa 97 Selecting RD 700 Sounds from an External MIDI Device 97 Using the RD 700 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode 98 Points to Note Regarding GM Mode L a 98 Plaine Back GM SCOTIA AS 98 PB DENGICES vivir 99 TFOUDICSMOOUIN O essa 99 Error Messages Other Messages 103 EITeCU Parameter LISDuuu uu u u orig 104 TONE EISEuu uuu an tente Sa zinnia den es eme e Gin eene recens es 135 O d ni 138 Arpeggio Siye LISE id na est nan 142 RVM Pattern Lituania 143 SEUD LIS o sss sg 144 SNONCUTLIS ansia is 145 MIDI Impiem en tialioiiuuu ullu l u uya su ete 146 Mal Specitca tons acid 164 1 E O 165 Purpose Oriented Index conccconncconncccccncccncocononnnonnnnnennnnnnnanonnnnnrnnanrrnannrenannrnnanennnannnas 168 ci ii AA APP 170 General MIDI General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance General MIDI 2 MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited an
9. o 0 O o 7 LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Selecting the Part to Be Set lt Part gt Tone Choose the Part for which you want to make settings Parameter Value 1 16 Parts assigned to the Local parts are indicated by a marker UPPER1 ap pearing after the part name When the lt Part gt to be set is select ed the name of the assigned tone ap pears You can select tone using the TONE SELECT buttons Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel When using MIDI messages from an external MIDI device to play the RD 700 set the Receive channels for each of the RD 700 s parts so they re matched up with the channels that ll be used for transmission by the external MIDI device Parameter Value Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan Sets the panning localizes sound image for each of the Tones The Volume setting is mainly used in the Split and Layer key modes to obtain the desired balance in volume between each part The Pan setting localizes the sound image of each part when the output is in stereo With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to 0 the sound is heard as coming from the center Parameter Value Making the Effect ON OFF Settings MFX Switch This setting determines wheth
10. A me o un arpeggios continue playing The arpeggio is played with the sequence of notes C E G E C E G E and even after the keys are released p 73 SO On Try playing some other chords too MEMO When the Arpeggio s 3 Arpeggio Hold is set to ON If you press ARPEGGIO once more the indicator light goes in Edit mode p 87 out and the keyboard returns to the normal performance I P ee id mode if an arpeggio is played while a rhythm plays the arpeggio will stop at the moment that the rhythm stops 49 Y Q c Lin s 2 c 0 gt Le U Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Changing the Arpeggio Style You can select the way an arpeggio is played the style to match a variety MEMO of different musical genres For more information on arpeggio styles refer to Setting the Way Arpeggios are Played Style p 84 Press ARPEGGIO getting the indicator to light Press CURSOR P to go to the Arpeggio Rhythm screen The following Arpeggio Rhythm screen appears MEMO When you re at the Tone 25128 4 screen you can press RH ani SBeat Pop 1 CURSOR P 1 to go to the Arpeggio Rhythm screen From the Arpeggio Rhythm screen you can get back to the Tone screen by Press CURSOR w to move the cursor to ARP pressing CURSOR 4 Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the style The arpeggio s style cha
11. s COCO Arpeggios continue to play 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen even after the keys are re Arpeggio Hold leased EDIT local Part 14k Sein pri oe CRE the Ra orador are released Velocity Sens 32 Velocita Maxi Izr Kew Transroses The NEM so indicator flashes when the Arpeggio Hold is set to ON EDIT CLocal Part 24h Local Part Masai DanmPer Pedal Sh Switching Hold On and Off with the Buttons aa r jai clip Hogdulation Sh Even when not in the Edit screen you can use the Bender gt buttons to turn the Hold function on and off EDIT local Partl 34 Local Part Maa H Or Hold is turned on or off each time the button is Control SH Part AS35139 PART 1 l Hold down ARPEGGIO and press TRANSPOSE pressed m o o 0 4 Press CURSOR d Jor b to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value You can set the Key Range by pressing the specified keys 87 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Selecting the Part to Be Set lt Local Part gt Choose the Local Part for which you want to make settings You can select the Local part by using the PART SELECT buttons Para
12. E k Q Getting Ready Turning the Power On and Off Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Turning On the Power 1 24 Before you switch on the power turn the volume down all the way by rotating the VOLUME Slider Also completely turn down the volume of any connected audio device and other equipment VOLUME Ot11111111M EE Press the upper portion of the POWER switch to turn on the power The unit is powered up and the display s backlighting comes on ON Turn on the power to connected external devices Adjust the volume ot the connected external device Adjust the RD 700 s volume to obtain the proper volume level To prevent incorrect functioning of the Pitch Bend Lever p 48 refrain from touching the lever while the power to the RD 700 is turned on This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Getting Ready Turning Off the Power 1 Before you switch on the power turn the volume down all the way by rotating the VOLUME Slider Also completely turn down the volume of any connected audio device and other equipment Turn off the power to connected external devices Press the lower por
13. APPe3310 Local Part Param Internal Part Pen Utilita Edit Screen EDIT Sustem Ty CURSOR Switch screens Master Tune EVEUD PDHZ D Master Yo lume EQ Control LED Contrast Tone Remain A Clock Source Select an item N Rx Gm Sustem OH RA GAS Susztem OM Re GS Resets DEC NO INC YES Control Channel Device ID Change the value You can input the value using The number of Edit screen the TONE SELECT buttons and pages may vary according press ENTER to set the value to the menu selected I Exit the Edit Mode EDIT Extinguishing EDIT indicator Making System Settings System Functions that affect the RD 700 s overall operating environment are called System functions How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SS Len 1 kes Touch z Control EG z MPa ReverbeChorus Tone Edit 2 Press CURSOR to select 0 System 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen EDIT stem 14h Master Tune EGRESHz Master Lolume EG Controls LED Contrast Tone Remain Clock Source EDIT Caystend Ra GH system OH Ra GMZ S ysten OH Aa GS Reset Control Channel Denice ID ELIT Cavstend Pedal Polarity DanmPer STANDARDI FE1 3TANDARD FOS TAHDARD 4 Press CURSOR 4 or gt to switch screens and press CURSOR
14. Cho Rate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 27 OD gt FLANGER Overdrive gt Flanger This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Flg Delay Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate Flanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Depth Flanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 112 Effect Parameter List Flg Bal Flanger Balance 31 DIST gt DELAY Distortion gt Delay Ad
15. ONE TOUCH 6 PART SWITCH LEVEL Turns each part s sound on and off PART SWITCH and adjusts the volume level for each part PART LEVEL slider p 45 When MIDI TX is on this controls each part for the external MIDI sound generator p 62 7 KEYBOARD CONTROL ARPEGGIO Switches Arpeggiator on off p 49 TRANSPOSE Sets the range of the keyboard to transposed p 46 8 ONE TOUCH SPLIT Puts the keyboard in Split mode wherein you can use more than one tone by having different tones play in different parts of the keyboard p 43 LAYER Puts the keyboard in Layer mode in which the keyboard plays two tones simultaneously p 42 PIANO Selects the optimum settings for piano performances p 35 SETUP Calls up the stored settings Setup p 54 Additionally pressing PIANO and SETUP simultaneously allows you to access more detailed piano performance settings PIANO EDIT p 66 Panel Descriptions FUNCTION PART SELECT EXPANSION LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 EDIT WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOC Jee CI CI 29 09 09 9 09 7 NZ __pEmo PLAy TONE SELECT V BRASS VOICE DEC NO INC YES ry cr MALLET r o S PAD a cy cr ET 9 DISPLAY This shows the Tone names and the values of various settings etc p 32 10 CURSOR a vw 4 P Press these to switch pages and to move the cursor p 33 11 DEC NO INC YES ENTER This is used to modify v
16. Parameter Value MED With Clock Source p 70 set to MIDI M appears in the display and the RD 700 is synchronized to the tempo of the external MIDI device The tempo cannot be changed with the RD 700 when M is indicated Changing Patterns Pattern This selects the rhythm pattern Select from 85 options When this is set to OFF the Rhythm does not sound even if PART SWITCH RHYTHM is pressed Parameter Value Refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 143 Pattern NEM You can also change a rhythm s pattern in the Rhythm Arpeggio screen p 32 MEMO When you change Patterns while a Rhythm is being played back the change to the new Pattern is made at the following measure Selecting Rhythm Variations Rhythm Type Each Rhythm pattern features two variations that make up each variation different percussion sounds Type 1 offering the simple Rhythm and Type 2 featuring the elaborate Rhythm Parameter Value MEMO When this is set to 2 a kal is displayed in the upper right of each screen MEMO You can assign this function to a pedal and use the pedal to control the function For details refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals FC1 FC2 p 73 MEMO When the Type is changed while a Rhythm is being played back a one measure fill in short Phrase is inserted then the new Type is played Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT
17. This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound Boost Lvl Low Booster Level Adjust the level Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end Depending on the Isolator and filter settings this effect may be hard to distinguish Level Output Level Adjust the output level 60 3D CHORUS This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the chorus sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation frequency of the chorus sound gt Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the chorus sound Fltr Type OFF A filter will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear the output sound The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boo
18. For example to have E sound when you play C on the keyboard hold down TRANSPOSE and press the E4 key The degree of transposition then becomes 4 When you release TRANSPOSE the previous display will reappear When the amount of transposition is set the Transpose function switches on and TRANSPOSE lights up When the indicator is flashing a Transpose settings value of 0 is selected To turn off Transpose press TRANSPOSE so that its indicator goes off The next time TRANSPOSE is pressed the sound is transposed by an amount corresponding to the value set here PART SELECT Note messages from MIDI IN will not be transposed EXPANSION FUNCTION 04 6 6 6 6 3 6 6 6 E MEMO Even when the Transpose function is turned on the Split Point remains unchanged MEMO You can set the degree of transposition for each of the Local parts p 31 individually For details refer to Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Part Key Transpose p 88 Performing with the Keyboard Adding Reverberation to the Sound REVERB knob The RD 700 can apply a reverb effect to the notes you play on the keyboard Applying reverb adds pleasing reverberation to what you play so it sounds almost as if you were playing in a concert hall REVERB Adjust the REVERB knob to select the amount of reverb effect to be applied Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper reverb an
19. High Lvl Level High Mid Lvl Level Middle Low Lvl Level Low These boost and cut each of the High Middle and Low frequency ranges At 60 dB the sound becomes inaudible 0 dB is equivalent to the input level of the sound 122 Effect Parameter List AP Mid Sw Anti Phase Middle Switch This turns the Anti Phase function on and off and sets the level settings for the Middle frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal AP Mid Anti Phase Middle Level Sets the level of the separate midrange Middle anti phase function With some settings you can get a sort of abstract sound in the specified Part Adjusting these levels for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source AP Low Sw Anti Phase Low Switch This turns the Anti Phase function on and off and sets the level settings for the Low frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal AP Low Sw Anti Phase Low Switch Sets the level of the separate Lowrange anti phase function With some settings you can get a sort of abstract sound in the specified Part Adjusting these levels for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Boost Sw Low Booster Switch Adjust whether Low Booster will be used ON or not OFF
20. Provide output of the audio signals These are connected to an amp or other device For monaural output use the L MONO jack p 22 These also feature balanced output 8 PHONES Jack A set of headphones can be connected to this jack p 22 Even when headphones are connected sound will still be output from the output jacks Getting Ready Installing the Wave Expansion Board Up to two optional Wave Expansion Boards SRX Series can be installed in the RD 700 Wave Expansion Boards store Wave data Patches and Rhythm Sets and by equipping the RD 700 with these boards you can greatly expand your sound palette Cautions When Installing an Wave Expansion Board O To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board e Before you touch the board always first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged e When handling the board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touching any of the electronic components or connectors e Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped and put the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it O Use a Philips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screw a Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt number 2 screwdriver If an unsuitable screwdriver is us
21. These messages are transmitted when Reverb value is set in MIDI Tx Mode OEffect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Chorus value is set in MIDI Tx Mode ORPN MSB LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN Il lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device transmits the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IIH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H 00H 01H mmH IH Channel Fine Tuning mm 11 20 00H 40 00H
22. 0000 cccc Tone Category 9 0 511 s 00 39 0000 000a 0000 bbbb 00 00 00 73 Total Size 0000 cccc Tone Category 10 0 511 00 3C Qaaa aaaa FC 1 Assign 0 106 OSetup Common MFX OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP TAP TEMPO Offset RHYTHM START STOP RHYTHM TYPE Address Description iT ARPEGGIO ON OFF MFX ON OFF Q CONTROL SRC 00 00 aaa aaaa MFX Type 0 65 Q 00 3D Oaaa aaaa FC 2 Assign 0 106 00 01 aaa aaaa lt Reserved gt om OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 00 02 Oaaa aaaa lt Reserved gt ne BEND AFT OCT UP OCT DOWN 00 03 aaa aaaa lt Reserved gt c START STOP TAP TEMPO RHYTHM START STOP RHYTHM TYPE 00 04 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 0 16 Q ARPEGGIO ON OFF MFX ON OFF OFF 1 16 Q CONTROL SRC 00 05 0000 aaaa Q 0000 bbbb lt 0000 cccc 154 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 11 15 19 21 25 29 31 35 39 41 45 49 51 55 59 61 65 69 71 75 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
23. 1 Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine Fine Pitch 1 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps one cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the pitch shifted sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 24 REVERB The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space Type Reverb Type Select the type of Reverb effect ROOM1 de
24. 127 0 100 0 40 2x 00 Daaa aaaa od Pitch Control 40 88 24 24 semitone 40 2x 01 Daaa aaaa od TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 9600 9600 cent x BLOCK NUMBER 0 F 40 2x 02 Daaa aaaa od Amplitude Control 127 R E S e Part 1 MIDI ch 1 x 1 40 2x 03 Daaa aaaa od LFO1 Rate Control as ahs ae Part 2 MIDI ch 2 x 40 2x 04 Daaa aaaa od LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 0 600 cent a 40 2x 05 Qaaa aaaa od LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 Part 9 MIDI ch 9 x 9 0 2400 cent 40 2x 06 Qaaa aaaa od LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 Part10 MIDI ch 10 x 0 0 100 0 40 2x 07 Qaaa aaaa od LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 Part11 MIDI ch 11 x A 10 0 10 0 Hz _ 40 2x 08 Oaaa aaaa od LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 Part12 MIDI ch 12 x B 0 600 cent 40 2x 09 Oaaa aaaa od LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 y 0 2400 cent Part16 MIDI ch 16 x F 40 2x OA Qaaa aaaa od LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 0 100 0 40 2x 10 Daaa aaaa Bend Pitch Control 64 88 ODrum Setup Parameter 0 24 semitone 40 2x 11 Daaa aaaa Bend TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 Start I a I 9600 9600 cent Address Description 40 2x 12 Qaaa aaaa Bend Amplitude Control 0 127 a I _ 100 0 100 0 5 41 m0 00 Daaa aaaa Drum Map Name 1 32 127 40 2x 13 daaa aaaa Bend LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 32 127 asc I 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 m0 01 Daaa aaaa Drum Map Name 2 32 127 40 2x 14 Daa
25. 127 0 100 0 n 40 2x 37 Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 O 10 0 10 0 Hz Q 40 2x 38 Daaa aaaa PAf LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 Saa 0 600 cent O 40 2x 39 Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 c 0 2400 cent 40 2x 3A Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 o 0 100 0 o 158 BArpeggio Parameter List Arpeggio Style value parameter value parameter value parameter 0 4 15 HEAVY SLAP 30 SWING WALTZ T 6 6 LIGHT SLAP 31 REGGAE 2 8 17 WALK BASS 32 PERCUSSION 3 12 18 RHYTH GTR 1 33 HARP 4 16 19 RHYTH GTR 2 34 SHAMISEN 5 1 32 20 RHYTHM GTR 3 35 BOUND BALL 6 PORTAMENTO A 21 RHYTH GTR 4 36 RANDOM 7 PORTAMENTO B 22 RHYTH GTR 5 37 BOSSA NOVA 8 GLISSANDO 23 3 FINGER 38 SALSA 9 SEQUENCE A 24 STRUM GTR UP 39 AMBO 10 SEQUENCE B 25 STRUM GTR DOWN 40 ATIN PERCUSSION 11 SEQUENCE C 26 STRUM GTR UP amp DW 41 SAMBA 12 SEQUENCE D 27 PIANO BACKING 42 TANGO 13 ECHO 28 CLAVI CHORD 43 HOUSE 14 SYNTH BA
26. After INC YES or DEC NO is pressed the following screen appears the Setup screen then reappears after a few moments The screen does not change when the TONE SELECT buttons are used to input Setup numbers Press ENTER afterwards to set the number SETUP RHY H amp E RAYS Funk 5 I FH FH NN 34 PART SELECT The current settings are erased when a Setup is called up Be sure to save any Setup you would like to keep first before calling up another Setup p 56 f EXPANSION J FUNCTION When the Tone screen is displayed the SETUP indicator lights and the Setup screen appears when CURSOR is pressed From the Setup screen you can get back to the Tone screen by pressing CURSOR P 1 However the Tone Wheel screen is displayed if Tone Wheel is selected for any Part in the Tone screen For detailed refer to Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode p 75 EMD Setups indicated by a RHY before the name let you enjoy performing with a session like feel while playing a Rhythm Be sure to check it out Using the Convenient Functions in Performances NEO Try playing the keyboard The RHYTHM indicator The settings are switched to those of the Setup that has been called up flashes if you select a setup that has Intro Ending set to ON Press RHYTHM to Selecting Setups Without Pressing NUM LOCK start the rhythm with the Intro Using
27. Attack Time MIDI TX Part 64 Attack Time Tone iia lis 81 B B R Bend Range MIDI TX Part 64 lt Band gt Equalizer Band ses ne 74 Bank Select iia aida 61 97 Beat Pattern arieni needa snate 86 Bend Range Tone lara 81 Bender Sw Local Part uuu y u nn 89 Bender Modulation Lever 48 BND Bender Switch MIDI TX Part o ae 65 Pulk DOME raices 92 Bulk Dump SE CUP nadia 92 Bulk DUMP Temporary ninas ann tests 92 C C T Coarse Tune MIDI TX Part 65 CHO Chorus MIDI TX Part aerea 63 Chorus Chorus parameters sites 134 Chorus Amount Tone 80 Choras SR RS A AO 47 Chorus Feedback eseina an h has 79 CIIORUSENOD20 10 us ue eee 12 47 Chorus Tre Delay aasan uw meg ees 78 io h L u a Su ee eyes es 78 Choras Delay isis 78 Clock Source System 6s cigs shies den needs dires 70 Coarse Tune Tone uuu iQ dns 80 COF Cutofl MIDI TX Particionar 64 CONN CUNE sra datent 22 Pedals La una ul nn 23 PR no nd 74 Controlic hannel Systainer 71 CONTROLE SANO saldar 12 59 Control Sw Local Part us 89 Control LO rats odiado loe 73 CTR CONTROL Knob Switch MIDI TX Part 65 CURSOR orar elote 13 33 Culoll Ton ie a 81 D Damper Damper Pedal Polarity System 71 Damper Pedal Sw Local Part
28. Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 02H Sub ID 2 General MIDI Off F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages is received this instrument will return to Normal mode Universal Realtime System Exclusive Messages OMaster Volume Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 01H IH mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control messages 01H Sub ID 2 Master Volume 11H Master Volume lower byte mmH Master Volume upper byte F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The lower byte 11H of Master Volume will be handled as 00H The Master Volume parameter EDIT System Master Volume will change OMaster Fine Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 03H IH mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 03H Sub ID 2 Master Fine Tuning 11H Master Fine Tuning LSB mmH Master Fine Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive mm 11 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 100 0 99 9 cents OMaster Coarse Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 04H 11H mmH F7H FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 04H Sub ID
29. Drive Sw Drive Switch Turns Drive on off Drive Specifies the depth of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Vowel 1 Selects the vowel 1 Vowel 2 Selects the vowel 2 Rate Sets the frequency at which the two vowels will be switched gt Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth Sets the effect depth Key Sync KeySync Switch Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset according to the input sound ON or not OFF Threshold Keysync Threshold Specifies the volume level for which reset will be applied 116 Effect Parameter List Manual Sets the point at which the two vowels will be switched When set to 50 Vowels 1 and 2 switched in the same amount of time Setting this higher than 50 increases the time for Vowel 1 setting this lower than 50 decreases the time for Vowel 1 Low Gain Specifies the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Specifies the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Pan Output Pan Specifies the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Specifies the output volume 44 RING MODULAT Ring Modulat
30. MULTI 40 1x 15 Daaa aaaa Use for Rhythm Part 0 2 nnH Num OFF MAP1 MAP2 sum check sum T 40 1x 16 0Oaaa aaaa Pitch Key Shift 40 88 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive ey Cre wr eee es Hees semitone 0000 bbbb Pitch Offset Fine 8 248 12 0 12 0 Hz 40 1x 19 Daaa aaaa Part Level CC 7 0 127 40 1x 1A Daaa aaaa Velocity Sens Depth 0 64 40 1x 1B Daaa aaaa Velocity Sens Offset 0 64 40 1x 1C Daaa aaaa Part Panpot CC 10 0 gt RANDOM L63 D 40 1x 1D Daaa aaaa Keyboard Range Low 0 1 O 40 1x 1E Daaa aaaa Keyboard Range High 0 1 40 1x 1F Daaa aaaa CC1 Controller Number 0 O 40 1x 20 Oaaa aaaa CC2 Controller Number 0 40 1x 21 Daaa aaaa Chorus Send Level CC 93 0 127 Q 40 1x 22 aaa aaaa Reverb Send Level CC 93 0 127 q 40 1x 23 0000 000a Rx Bank Select A OFF ON p wv MIDI Implementation 40 1
31. Performing with the Keyboard Playing Different Tones in Two Different Sections of MEMO the Keyboard SPLIT das a You can change the split Such a division of the keyboard into right and left hand sections is called a Son Split and the key where the division takes place is called the Split Plea a refer to Changing Point The split point key is included in the UPPER section the Keyboard s Split The Split Point has been set at the factory to C4 Point p 44 VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION LO MID GH A A W fyl of ED GITB CONE EFFECTS LP TONE SELECT 040 BeBe PART SWITCH LEVEL Se E TOUCH Press SPLIT getting the indicator to light PART SWITCH LOWER lights Try fingering the keyboard 25128 WFi Bet 5t Concert 1 MTS 144 RD Ac Bass The UPPER tone plays in the right hand section of the keyboard and the LOWER tone plays in the left hand section Split Point C4 LOWER lt UPPER J 0 ja O a 3 Q 2 To exit Split mode press SPLIT once more and the indicator light goes out Selecting Both Layer and Split Mode When both LAYER and SPLIT are on the LOWER Tone is played at the left side of the Split Point while the UPPER1 and UPPER2 Tones are layered to the right of the Split Point 2128 OH ni St Concert 1 Wes 999 RD Strinas LWA 144 RD AC
32. Then calculate the checksum 10H 00H 04H 00H 02H 16 0 4 0 2 22 sum 22 sum 128 0 quotient 22 remainder checksum 128 22 remainder 106 6AH This means that FO 41 10 00 43 12 10 00 04 00 02 6A F7 is the message should be sent lt Example2 gt Getting Temporary Performance data RQ1 cf This operation is the same as Bulk Dump Temporary function in Utility According to the Parameter Address Map p 153 the start address of Temporary Setup is assigned as following 10 00 00 00H Setup Common 10 00 69 00H Setup Tone Wheel 10 Backup As the data size of Setup Tone Wheel Back up is 00 00 00 OBH summation of the size and the start address of Setup Tone Wheel 10 Back up at Temporary Setup will be 10 00 69 00H 00 00 00 OBH 10 00 69 OBH And the size that have to be got should be 10 00 69 OBH 10 00 00 00H 00 00 69 OBH Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 0043 11 10000000 0000 69 0B 22 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID RD 700 5 Command ID RQ1 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in lt Example 2 gt we get a message of F0 41 10 00 43 11 10 00 00 00 00 00 69 OB 7C to be transmitted MIDI Implementation WThe Scale Tune Feature address 40 1x 40 The scale Tune feature allows you to finely adjust the individual pitch of th
33. Tones The Volume setting is mainly used in the Split and Layer key modes to obtain the desired balance in volume between each part The Pan setting positions the sound image of each part when the output is in stereo With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to 0 the sound is heard as coming from the center VOL Volume CC07 0 127 PAN Pan CC10 L63 0 63R Setting the Amount of Reverb and Chorus This sets the depth of the reverb and chorus effects REV Reverb CC93 0 127 CHO Chorus CC91 0 127 Setting the Key Range LWR UPR Set the keyboard range in which each Part will sound This can be used to make notes in different areas of the keyboard play different Tones Specify the lower limit LWR and upper limit UPR of the key range being set Parameter Value LWR Lower A0 C8 UPR Upper A0 C8 This is effective only when SPLIT is on p 43 in the key range settings You cannot set the key range s lower limit higher than the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit below the lower limit MEMO You can use PART SWITCH for each individual part to select whether or not MIDI Note messages for that part are to be 63 Q vu O A O lt O O Q o ne das 5 O 2 gt xX da misa
34. e When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements e A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night e When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Main Features Progressive Hammer Action The RD 700 features a progressive hammer action a new and even more advanced form of Roland s popular keyboard hammer action that realistically reproduces the comfortable natural touch of a grand piano Basic percussive and damper functions are also improved recreating the subtle changes in touch occurring between registers as you move across the keyboard In addition the progressive hammer action keyboard has been designed with consideration given to the environment and the hammer section is completely lead free New Piano Tones The RD 700 s authentic piano T
35. gt S lt gt O Overview of the RD 700 Basic Operation of the RD 700 Main Screens The Tone Screen Basic Screen The names of the Tones currently selected for the Local Parts are displayed This is the screen that is ordinarily displayed When ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed setting the RD 700 to the optimal status for piano performances this screen is displayed You can change the Local Part UPPER1 UPPER2 and LOWER Tones and tempo 2128 dh a sn 5t Concert 1 The Tone Wheel Screen In the Tone screen when any ORGAN Tone Tone Wheel 1 10 is selected for any of the Local Parts this screen is displayed when CURSOR d is pressed The mode when this screen is displayed is called Tone Wheel mode and while in this mode you can simulate the creation of sounds using an organ s harmonic bars Pressing CURSOR b when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen 5128 4k LIP1 Piti Tone dheeel gt itn 510w The Setup Screen The currently selected Setup is displayed Pressing CURSOR 4 when the Tone screen or Tone Wheel Screen is displayed switches the RD 700 to this screen You can also have this screen displayed by pressing SETUP You can change the Setups Pressing CURSOR gt when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen or Tone Wheel Screen 25128 SETUP St Concert SIMGLE The Rhythm Arpeggio Screen Pressing
36. or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator When you exit Edit mode the changed System settings are stored to the RD 700 You are returned to the Tone screen MEMO Settings for system functions are saved in the RD 700 whenever a change is made to their parameters These settings are not deleted even when the power is turned off MEMO For more on the following system function parameters refer to the corresponding pages Master Tune gt p 29 LCD Contrast p 28 69 m o O o 0 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Adjusting the Volume Master Volume Adjusts the volume of the entire RD 700 Parameter Value Preventing Equalizer Settings from Being Switched EQ Control You can store different equalizer settings p 74 for each individual Setup p 54 This setting determines whether or not the Setup equalizer settings values are to be changed when Setups are switched Equalizer settings change when SETUP EQ Setups are switched Control N Equalizer settings op not change when Setups are switched MEMO When this is set to SYSTEM a aff is displayed in the upper right of each screen With this setting set to SYSTEM you cannot change the Control EQ settings p 74 Retaining
37. output Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo position of the delay sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 52 SP SIMULATOR Speaker Simulator Speaker Simulator is an effect that simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound Sp Type Speaker Type Select the type of speaker The specifications of each type are as follows The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser mic 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic 120 Effect Parameter List Mic Set Mic Setting Adjust the location of the mic that is
38. 097 098 099 099 100 101 102 103 103 103 104 105 105 106 107 108 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 116 117 117 118 118 119 119 119 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 123 No 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 Tone Name Bird Dog Horse Gallop Bird 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 DoorCreaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Helicopter Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Applause Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Gun Shot Machine Gun Laser Explosion MSB 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 LSB 000 001 002 003 000 001 002 003 004 005 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 000 001 002 003 004 005 000 001 002 003 PC 124 124 124 124 125 125 125 125 125 125 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 127 127 127 127 127 127 128 128 128 128 137 n O O O o o lt gt D D 0 3 G A un Note No 138 Rhythm Set List ___ No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number RD Pop Kit R amp B Snare Finger Snap 707 Claps Hand Clap 1
39. 12768 52768 00 12 0000 000a Transmit Level Switch 0 1 20000 20000 OFF ON 00 2E 0000 aaaa 00 13 aaa aaaa Transmit Level CC 7 0 127 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 14 0000 000a Transmit Pan Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 12 12768 52768 OFF ON 20000 20000 00 15 Daaa aaaa Transmit Pan CC 10 1 127 00 32 0000 aaaa L63 R63 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 16 0000 000a Transmit Coarse Tune Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 13 12768 52768 OFF ON 20000 20000 00 17 Daaa aaaa Transmit Coarse Tune 16 112 00 36 0000 aaaa 48 48 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 18 0000 000a Transmit Fine Tune Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 14 12768 52768 OFF ON 20000 20000 00 19 Daaa aaaa Transmit Fine Tune 14 114 00 3A 0000 aaaa 50 50 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 1A 0000 000a lt Reserved gt 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 15 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 1B 0000 00aa lt Reserved gt 00 3E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 1C 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 16 12768 52768 OFF ON 20000 20000 00 1D 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Switch Value 0 1 00 42 0000 aaaa OFF ON 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 00 1E 0000 000a Transmit Portamento Time Switch 0 1 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 17 12768 52768 OFF ON 20000 20000 00 1F Daaa aaaa Transmit Portamento Time
40. 8 F daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 16 0 24 00 03 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 5 1 3 0 8 3 cy a 40 01 30 Daaa aaaa Reverb Macro 0 7 4 a de o en ina hie a E 40 01 31 Daaa aaaa Reverb Character 0 7 00 06 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 2 2 3 0 8 i a as ss o oa ee too 00 07 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 2 0 8 ee pes 00 08 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 1 3 5 0 8 e i ee dake ds as Fen 00 09 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 1 1 3 0 8 ze aaa asada Reverb Delay Feedbac 0 5 7 00 OA 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar T 0 8 40 01 36 Daaa aaaa Reverb Send Level to Chorus 0 127 I 40 01 38 Daaa aaaa Chorus Macro 0 7 B T 1 ne sue ees GPa Eas 40 01 39 Daaa aaaa Chorus Pre LPF 0 7 40 01 3A Daaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 40 01 3B Daaa aaaa Chorus Feedback 0 127 OBulk Dump parameters 40 01 3C aaa aaaa Chorus Delay 0 127 40 01 3D Daaa aaaa Chorus Rate 0 127 40 01 3E Daaa aaaa Chorus Depth 0 127 2 40 01 3F Daaa aaaa Chorus Send Level to Reverb 0 127 These messages are transmitted when Bulk Dump SETUP function is executed These messages will be written when SETUP write m is received g tte en SETU te message is received OPart Parameter Start Start Address Description Address Description Size 4 40 1x 00 Daaa aaaa Tone Number CC 00 Value 0 127 10 01 00 00 Setup 001 00 00 05 6C Daaa aaaa Tone Number PC Value 0 127 10 02 00 00 Setup 002 00 00 05 6C 40 1x 02 Daa
41. BYPASS lt Other Prm gt Value You can make more detailed reverb settings When Other Prm is selected the indication of the corresponding Value changes and the value is set Refer to REVERB p 134 Setting Chorus and Delay Chorus adds depth and spaciousness to the sound You can select whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect MEMO You can set the amount of chorus applied separately for each Tone p 80 Chorus Delay You can select whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect Values Chorus Delay When Chorus Delay is Set to Chorus Chorus Pre Delay Specifies the delay time from the original sound until when the chorus sound is heard The delay time increases as the value is raised Values 0 0 100 0 Chorus Rate Specifies the modulation frequency of the chorus sound The interval between undulations is shortened as this value is increased Values 0 05 10 00 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Chorus Feedback Making Tone Settings Tone Edit Sets the level at which the chorus sound is re input fed back l You can make more detailed settings to the tones assigned to into the chorus By using feedback a denser chorus sound each of the Internal parts can be created Higher values result in a greater feedback level Values 0 127 In certain selected Tones there may be parameters that cannot be changed lt Other Prm gt Value
42. Bass Performing with the Keyboard Changing the Keyboard s Split Point You can change the point at which the keyboard is divided the Split Point in Split mode Hold down SPLIT for several seconds A screen such as the following appears and the current value of the setting is displayed MEMO 3P1ift Point I aRb You can freely set the ranges for UPPER1 EEL AEE UPPER2 and LOWER as you prefer For details refer to Setting the Key Hold down SPLIT and press a key RE Part Key p 88 When you release SPLIT the previous display will reappear The split point key is included in the UPPER section Changing Tones in Layer and Split Mode When you want to change tones in Layer and Split mode use the PART SELECT buttons to specify the part for which the tone is to be changed VOLUME KEYBOARD CONTROL I H iia RHYTHM LOWER UP LEE de q P ON OFF e e e D gt z z mR E C Z TONE SELECT a viy via vv o PIANO SETUP E C CT 38 Se a SE a O EMER L PIANO EDIT J PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH O S E x o Che x Q A Press the PART SELECT button for the part whose tone you want to change causing the part s indicator to light up The indicator for the currently selected TONE SELECT button lights up in the same color as the indicator for the selected part However the TONE SELECT buttons do not light when NUM L
43. Changing the Drum Set Rhy Set You can change a rhythm s drum set set of drum and percussion tones Parameter Value Refer to Tone List p 135 NEM You can select Tones other than Rhythm Sets E When this setting is changed the Part 10 Tone also changes Depending on the Rhythm Set that is selected the Rhythm Set may not play back properly Changing the Pattern Without Changing the Drum Set Rhy Set Change Each Rhythm in a rhythm pattern has the most suitable drum set assigned to it When rhythm patterns are changed the drum sets also switch so the tone is changed but here the drum set stays constant and does not change When the Rhythm is changed the drum set also changes When the Rhythm is changed the drum set does not change Switching the Intro and Ending On or Off Intro Ending These settings determine whether a Rhythm s intro and ending play ON or don t OFF Parameter Value Description The rhythm s intro and end ON ing are included Intro Ending The rhythm s intro and end OFF ing are not included Making Arpeggio Settings Arpeggio The function that allows you to perform arpeggios chords whose notes are played sequentially rather than together from a chord s constituent notes just by playing the chord is called Arpeggiater You can make more detailed arpeggio settings including tempo and range NEM For mor
44. DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 2 BASS UP 5 TOP UP 5 BASS UP 5 TOP UP 5 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 CHORD CHORD CHORD SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN BASS UP TOP SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN CHORD BASS CHORD 4 BASS CHORD 5 BASS CHORD 2 BASS UP 2 BASS RND 2 TOP UP 2 BASS CHORD 2 BASS UP 2 BASS RND 2 TOP UP 2 CHORD BASS CHORD 1 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN GLISSANDO TOP UP 4 6 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO SINGLE RANDOM DUAL RANDOM BASS RND 1 3 all all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO all all all all all there is no restriction on the value which can be set 142 Beat Pattern 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 SEQ A 1 SEQ C 1 MUTE 02
45. High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Standard KK1 Side Stick Standard SN1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Room Tom 5 Close HiHat2 Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat2 Room Tom 2 Open HiHat2 Room Tom 2 Room Tom 2 Crash Cym 1 Room Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 GM2 POWER High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Power Kick1 Side Stick Dance Snare1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Rock Tom 4 Close HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Pedal HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 1 Crash Cym 1 Rock Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shake
46. LOW Gain 12 Pd 4 Press CURSOR 4 Jor b to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Assigning Functions to Pedals FC1 FC2 This setting determines the function of the pedal switches or expression pedals such as the optional EV 5 that are connected to the FC1 and FC2 jacks on the rear panel Param eter Function Parameter Setting Changed FC2 ER CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 96 PITCH BEND 97 AFTER TOUCH 98 OCT UP 99 OCT DOWN 100 START STOP 101 TAP TEMPO 102 RHY PLY STP 103 RHYTHM TYPE 104 ARPEGGIO SW 105 MEX ON OFF 106 CONTROL SRC Controller Numbers 1 31 33 95 Applies the same effect pitch bend obtained by tilting the bender to the left and right After Touch Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower Starts Stops the external se quencer The tempo will be modified to the interval at which you press the pedal Starts and stops Rhythms p 51 Switches the rhythm variations p 82 Performs the same function as ARPEGGIO Switches the Ar peggio p 49 on a
47. Level Output Level Adjust the output level 45 MULTI TAP DLY Multi Tap Delay The Multi Tap Delay has four delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be specified as a note length of the selected tempo You can also set the panning and level of each delay sound Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 Delay Time 2 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 Delay Time 3 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 Delay Time 4 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 4 sound is heard 3 Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Pan 1 Output Pan 1 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 1 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Pan 2 Output Pan 2 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 2 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Pan 3 Output Pan 3 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 3 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Pan 4 Output Pan 4 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 4 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 1 Adjust the output level of delay 1 Level 2 Adjust the output lev
48. MULTI EFFECTS G DY E 7 PIANO SET UP o ONE TOUCH Press EDIT getting the indicator to light A ne O O e o E k Q The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SHS Len l Head Touch Ze Control EG z MP a ReverbeChorus Tone Edit ll Press CURSOR aa to select 0 System Press CURSOR P to display the Edit screen EDIT stem 14h Master Tune 48 HZ Master Volume 121 EX Control LCD Contrast Tone Remain Clock Sources 4 Press CURSOR or to move the cursor to the LCD Contrast parameter 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the value 1 10 The brightness of the display changes as the value is changed Adjust the contrast so that the display is easy to view 28 Getting Ready 6 Press EDIT to make the indicator go dark You are returned to the Tone screen Tuning to Other Instruments Pitches Master Tune For a cleaner ensemble sound while performing with one or more other MEMO instruments ensure that each instrument s basic pitch is in tune with that of The Master Tune setting is the other instruments In general the tuning of an instrument is indicated a system setting that is by the pitch in Hertz Hz of the middle A note applied to the entire RD This matching of other instruments basic reference pitches is called 700 i e is a system tuning setting Th
49. le RATE es ln ne 86 DIE Mod iia ia 41 SNS Velocity Sensitivity MIDI TX Part 65 Sound Generator Section ss 31 CA Rs saaanamashays 12 43 SPIE MOLE sn a a 41 43 DPM bot aaa 44 Src CONTO E AE 74 A A E ANRA 66 Stretch Tune TONE kareas ne 81 Style APETITO uvas iia 84 N aaa s ka amus 69 T Temperament isidro 91 TOMPO A dan 82 84 DOR A utu S u uu een 31 36 Lone Edic 79 Lone ESS usss asnu lios 135 Tome Remain Systemi wives secs u a ua a 70 TONE Screen rancia cs 32 TONE SELECT Button scada 13 33 36 Jone Wheel Mode acuarios 75 Tone Wheel Screen 32 TRA Transpose MIDI TX Part aa a una ana 64 Transmit chan irel uxqemacakaqqapakuqiiQakaqa kasuq e qu 60 TRANSPOSED sa uuu uy 12 46 a yanasun E 23 e a 23 A kna das a nn 29 Type NIUE Pile Type veian 77 U UPR Key Range Upper MIDI TX Part 63 Util adds 92 V Veloci aaa 72 Velocity ATPDES BIO eiii as 87 Velocity MIDI AX Pat 65 Velocity Delay eS 42 Velocity Keylolw Sepu u a a u a a a u q sa 72 Velocity Max Local Papa uu ku u Sua 88 Velocity Sens Local Part ati 88 AS cathe tS na en sas 90 VOL Volume MIDI TX Part 63 WO PNAC ea a senc 25 70 Local Part ias 45 MIDIS Pa eao 62 tema a re ne 90 VOLUME SHIGE enses e isa 12 25 W Wave Expansion Board 15 39 Wa
50. set to ON p 63 p 88 Tempo Doesn t Change Pitch is Odd Sound is Cut Off Sound Keeps Playing When Key is Pressed Exclusive Mes sages Cannot Be Received Setup Name Not Correctly Indi cated Is the System Clock Source setting in Edit mode set to MIDI e When you want to perform using the RD 700 s tempo set this to INT p 70 Depending on the Tone selected pitches played in certain registers will be changed and played at other pitches Is Coarse Tune Fine Tune or Stretch Tune set for any specific Part e Check the Tone Edit Course Tune Fine Tune and Stretch Tune set tings in Edit mode p 80 p 81 or C T and F T setting in MIDI TX screen p 65 Has the RD 700 gone out of tune Check the System Master Tune set tings in Edit mode p 29 Has the pitch been changed by pedal operations or by Pitch Bend messag es received from an external MIDI device When you try playing more than the maximum 128 voices simultaneous ly sounds currently being played may be cut out e Increase the Voice Reserve settings for the Parts you do not want to have cut off p 90 Is the hold pedal polarity reversed e Check the System Pedal Polarity settings in Edit mode p 71 Is the Device ID number of the trans mitting device matched to the RD 700 s Device ID number e Check the System Device ID set tings in Edit mode p 71 Is the RD 700 set to GM mode e Press ON
51. settings will invert the phase Flg Bal Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the chorus sound and the chorus sound that is passed through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that passes through the flanger will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 38 CHORUS DELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel The parameters are the same as for 35 CHORUS DELAY However the parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound 39 FLANGER DELA Y This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel The parameters are the same as for 36 FLANGER gt DELAY However the Delay Bal parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound 40 CHORUS FLANGER This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel The parameters are the same as for 37 CHORUS gt FLANGER However the Flg Bal parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound 41 STEREO PHASER With the Step effects you can also make stepped changes in the pitch of sounds to which the Phaser effect is applied Type Phaser Type Selects the type of Phaser Type 2 adds more of the Phaser effect to the high frequencies than Type 1 Mode Selects the number of stages in the phaser 4 8 Pol
52. 0 127 00 46 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 00 20 0000 000a Transmit Cutoff Switch 0 1 0000 cccc OFF ON 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 18 12768 52768 00 21 Daaa aaaa Transmit Cutoff 1 127 20000 20000 63 63 00 4A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 00 22 0000 000a Transmit Resonance Switch 0 1 0000 cccc OFF ON 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 19 12768 52768 00 23 Daaa aaaa Transmit Resonance 1 127 20000 20000 63 63 00 4E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 00 24 0000 000a Transmit Attack Time Switch 0 1 0000 cccc OFF ON 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 20 12768 52768 00 25 Daaa aaaa Transmit Attack Time 1 127 20000 20000 63 63 00 00 00 52 Total Size 00 26 0000 000a Transmit Release Time Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 27 Daaa aaaa Transmit Release Time 1 127 OSetup Local Part AR 00 28 0000 000a Transmit Pitch Bend Range Switch 0 1 Offset F OEP ON address Es 00 29 00aa aaaa Transmit Pitch Bend Range 0 48 ption de de 00 00 jaaa daaa Keyboard Range Lower 21 108 00 2A 0000 000a Transmit Chorus Level Switch ae ne Ad SUPLE 00 2B Qaaa aaaa Transmit Chorus Level 0 127 00 01 Daaa aaaa Keyboard Range Upper 21 108 i s E 7 BOWES 08 00 2c 0000 000a Transmit Reverb Level Switch 0 1 A PTE OFF ON mega Uses daaa e a eS ae me 00 2D aaa aaaa Transmit Reverb Level 0 127 00 03 Daaa aaaa Velocity Max 27 00 00 00 2E Total Si
53. 0 180 degree Filter Filter type OFF LPF HPF Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Effect Parameter List 15 ST FLANGER 127 gt o y 0 a A A Effect Parameter List 18 MOD DELAY 21 TIME CTRL DLY Parameter Value Parameter Value Delay L Delay time left 0 0 500 0 ms Delay Delay time 200 1000 ms Delay R Delay time right 0 0 500 0 ms Accel Acceleration 0 15 Feedback Feedback level 98 98 Feedback Feedback level 98 98 Mode Feedback mode NORMAL CROSS HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz BYPASS 1 Depth Depth 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Phase Phase 0 180 degree Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz High Gain High gain 15 15 dB BYPASS 1 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 High Gain High gain 15 15 dB 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 22 2V PCH SHIFT Parameter Value 1 9 TRI TAP DLY Coarse A
54. 00 03 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 4 32 127 y O 32 127 ASC z 1 4D T h 1 00 04 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 5 32 127 o9 CaO Os rans pose WEES pi a 32 127 ASC E L 4E T 1 23 1 00 05 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 6 32 127 oe eae ade TONSPOSE NATUS Ea zi a 32 127 ASCII 1 00 06 Vasa aaaa Setup Name 7 a ae ie 00 4F 0000 00aa Keyboard Mode Local 0 3 7 ASC SINGLE LAYER SPLIT SPLIT LAYER 00 07 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 8 32 127 00 50 D saan lt Reserved gt 325 127 ASCII 00 51 0000 O0aa Keyboard Mode External 0 3 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Setup Name 9 32 127 SINGLE LAYER SPLIT SPLIT LAYER 32 127 ASC f yi I z 2 R 00 09 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 10 32 127 009 gee ace AAA 32 127 ASC a z 00 53 Daaa aaaa Rhythm Pattern 0 127 00 0A Qaaa aaaa Setup Name 11 32 127 00 54 0000 O0aa Rhythm Type 0 ia 32 127 ASC L a 1 2 00 OB Daaa aaaa Setup Name 12 32 127 00 55 daa Saa Pose 32 127 ASCII 00 56 Qaaa aaaa lt Reserved gt 00 0 0 q 1 0 64 00 57 Daaa aaaa lt Reserved gt FREE ASS ci Se 00 58 0000 000a Rhythm Intro Ending Switch 0 1 OOS y SUE OFF ON 00 OD Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 2 0 64 00 59 0000 000a Rhythm Set Change O 1 0 63 FULL OFF ON 00 0E Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 3 0 64 L i 0 63 FULL _ 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 4 0 64 wae Doo vee EU te UPPER1 UPPER2 ee a 0 63 FULL i Don UE 00 10
55. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccce dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb ccce dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb ccce dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb ccce dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb ecce dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX MFX Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
56. 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 8 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 23 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 9 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 27 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 10 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 2B 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 11 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 2F 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 12 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 00 00 33 Total Size OSetup Common Reverb Offset Address Description 00 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 4 00 01 Daaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 00 02 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 1 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 06 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 2 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 OA 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 3 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 OF 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 4 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 12 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 5 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 16 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 6 12768 52768 20000 20000 155 gt D D 0 5 a A un MIDI Implementation
57. 03 MUTE 02 03 WALKBS REFRAIN 1 MUTE 01 04 MUTE 07 13 14 MUTE 08 12 15 MUTE 09 10 11 16 STRUM 1 6 SEQ A 7 STRUM 7 8 STRUM 7 8 STRUM 7 8 MUTE 12 REFRAIN 2 MUTE 05 06 3 4 1 6 1 12 SWING 3 4 1 16 1 3 REGGAE 1 2 PERC 1 4 HARP SEQ A 2 BOUND 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUIRO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 all 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 Accent Rate Shuffle Rate 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 Rhythm Pattern List No Rhythm Pattern Recommended No Rhythm Pattern Recommended Tempo Tempo 000 OFF 043 Motown 130 001 ShufflePop 1 92 044 Gospel 1 84 002 Shuf
58. 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 61 3D FLANGER 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Parameter Value 65 OD ROTARY Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 ms Rate LFO rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Parameter Value Depth LFO depth 0 127 Drive Drive O 127 Feedback Feedback 98 98 OD OutLvl Overdrive Output Level O 127 Phase Phase 0 180 degree OD Sw Overdrive Switch OFF ON Filter Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Low Slow Low Frequency Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Low Fast Low Frequency Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz StpRateSw Step rate switch OFF ON Low Accel Low Frequency Acceleration 0 15 Step Rate Step rate 0 1 20 0 Hz note Low Level Low Frequency Level 0 127 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES Hi Slow High Frequency Slow Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Fast High Frequency Fast Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Hi Accel High Frequency Acceleration 0 15 Balance Balance D100 0W D0 100W Hi Level High Frequency Level 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Separate Separation 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Speed Speed SLOW FAST 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Level Output Level 0 127 62 TREMOLO Parameter Value Mod Wave Modulation wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Rate Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 63 AUTO PAN Parameter Value Mod W
59. 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 Value LPF BPF 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 0 127 Value 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 15 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 15 0 127 0 127 SLOW FAST 0 127 Value 0 127 0 127 0 6 12 18 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB L64 0 63R 0 127 10 LIMITER Parameter Value Parameter Value Threshold Threshold level 0 127 Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Ratio Compression ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Release Release time 0 127 Depth Depth 0 127 Post Gain Post gain 0 6 12 18 dB Feedback Feedback level 98 98 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Phase Phase 0 180 degree High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Filter Filter type OFF LPF HPF Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W L 1 HEXA CHORUS Level Output level 0 127 Parameter Value 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 16 STEP FLANGER Delay Dev Pre delay deviation 0 20 Depth Dev Depth deviation 20 20 Parameter Value Pan Dev Pan deviation 0 20 Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Level Output level 0 127 Depth Depth 0 127 Feedback Fee
60. 2 Vibra slap Pop Ride Cymbal 1 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute Conga High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 2 Shaker 3 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Mute Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Shaker 1 Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Cana RD Jazz Kit R amp B Snare Jazz Swish Jazz Tap 1 Jazz Tap 2 Finger Snap 707 Claps Hand Clap Hand Clap2 Hand Clap Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Gospel Hand Clap Snare Roll Pop Kick Pop Kick Jazz Snare Swing Jazz Sanre 1 Pop Snare Swing Jazz Sanre 2 Jazz Low Tom Flm Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Jazz Low Tom Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Jazz Mid Tom Fim Pop OHH EXC1 Jazz Mid Tom Jazz High Tom Flm Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Jazz High Tom Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Chinees Cymbal Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Tambourine Pop Splash Cymbal Cha Cha Cowbell Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Pop Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute Conga High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 2 Shaker 3 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Mute Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Shaker 1 Jingle Bell Bell Tree Ca
61. 4 Tone Edit w 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 2 Control EQ 3 Press CURSOR gt to display the Edit page Feet Assignments in the Tone Wheel Screen JaA AR 16518 8 4 223 2 1351188 1 EDIT CHarmonic Barja LED OM LED OFF 4 Press CURSOR 4 W lI b to move the cursor to the parameter for changing the Feet LED ON and LED OFF in the screen indicate whether PART SWITCH is switched on or off Parameter Value 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 1 1 3 1 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the Feet 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Setting the Multi Effects Reverb and Chorus Effects MFX Reverb Chorus The RD 700 contains three effects processors multi effects chorus and reverb Settings can be made separately for each effects processor How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU SS Lem ke3 TOC Control EG 2 MPa Reverb Chorus 4 Tone Edit N Press CURSOR amp W to select 3 MFX Reverb Chorus 3 Press CURSOR gt to display the Edit screen EDITCHu1ti Effects 4h MFA Source LIPPER i HFA Dest SAME MFA TYRE bi oh RESOMNANCE HFA Control DEPTH Other Pris Reverb Reverb Pre Dls Reverb T
62. 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 37 CHORUS gt FLANGR Parameter Cho Delay Cho Rate Cho Depth Cho Bal Flg Delay Flg Rate Flg Depth Flg Fbk Flg Bal Level 38 CHORUS DELAY Chorus pre delay time Chorus rate Chorus depth Chorus balance Flanger pre delay time Flanger rate Flanger depth Flanger feedback level Flanger balance Output level Refer to 35 CHORUS gt DELAY 39 FLANGER DELAY Refer to 36 FLANGER gt DELAY 40 CHORUS FLANGR Refer to 37 CHORUS gt FLANGR 41 STEREO PHASER Parameter Type Mode Polarity Manual Rate Depth Resonance Cross Fbk Step Rate StpRateSw Mix Low Gain High Gain Level 130 Phaser type Mode Polarity Manual Phaser rate Phaser depth Phaser resonance Cross feedback level Step rate Step rate switch Mix level Low gain High gain Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 D100 0W DO 100W 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 D100 0W DO 100W 0 127 Value 1 2 4 STAGE 8 STAGE INVERSE SYNCHRO 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 127 98 98 0 1 20 0 Hz note OFF ON 0 127 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 127 42 KEYSYNC FLANG Parameter Value Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 ms Rate LFO rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Depth LFO depth 0 127 Feedback Feedback 98 98 Phase Phase 0 180 degree Filter Filter type O
63. Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo I Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL
64. CURSOR P when the Tone screen is displayed switches the RD 700 to this screen You can change Rhythm patterns Arpeggio patterns and the tempo Pressing CURSOR 4 when this screen is displayed returns you to the Tone screen AE 1 8Beat Pop 1 HEP Be lv 8 Special Indications HE When the contents of a Setup p 54 are changed an asterisk a mark appears on the right of the Setup number If you want to use the changed content as a new Setup save the settings to a Setup p 56 H With Clock Source p 70 set to MIDI the tempo indication changes to M for each screen The tempo can be changed with the external MIDI devices when this mark is indicated GE With EQ Control p 70 set to SYSTEM this mark appears on the screen Equalizer settings do not change when Setups are switched while this mark is indicated m With Rhythm Type p 82 set to 2 this mark appears on the screen About the Function Buttons FUNCTION EDIT WRITE MIDITX NUM LOCK L DEMO PLAy EDIT By pressing EDIT to make the indicator light you can enter Edit mode In Edit mode you can make detailed settings for various functions You can exit Edit mode by pressing EDIT extinguishing its indicator When exiting from Edit mode EDIT s indicator goes out Overview of the RD 700 WRITE Stores the current settings to Setup MIDI TX When MIDI TX
65. Chorus Rate Chorus Feedback lt Other Parameter gt Value Delay Center Delay Left Delay Right lt Other Parameter gt Value 4 Tone Edit P 79 5 Rhythm Pattern P 82 6 Arpeggio P 83 lt Part gt Tone Reverb Amount Chorus Amount MFX Mono Poly Coarse Tune Fine Tune Portamento Switch Portamento Time Attack Time Release Time Cutoff Resonance Bend Range Stretch Tune Tempo Pattern Rhythm Type Rhythm Set Rhythm Set Change Intro Ending Tempo Destination Part Key Range Style Octave Range Motif Beat Pattern Accent Rate Shuffle Rate Velocity Arpeggio Hold 7 Local Part Parameter P 87 lt Local Part gt Key Range Velocity Sensitivity Velocity Max Key Transpose Damper Pedal Switch FC1 Pedal Switch FC2 Pedal Switch Modulation Switch Bender Switch Control Switch Part Assign 8 Internal Part Parameter P 89 lt Part gt 9 Utility P 92 Receive Channel Volume Pan MFX Switch Voice Reserve Rx Bank Select Rx Program Change Rx Modulation Rx Bender Rx Volume Rx Hold 1 Rx Pan Temperament Temperament Key Rec Setting Bulk Dump Temporary Bulk Dump SETUP Factory Reset Current Factory Reset All Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Setting Parameters 1 Getting EDIT indicator light Enter the Edit Mode Edit Menu Screen Kes Touch Control E MPA ARelverb ERhorus Tone Edit Select a menu i en el Pattern Y
66. Effect Parameter List Parameters with the showing can be assigned to the MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Set MFX CONTROL following the instructions in How to Make Settings p 76 01 STEREO EQ Stereo Equalizer This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high Low Freq Low Frequency Select the frequency of the low range 200 Hz 400 Hz Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Freq High Frequency Select the frequency of the high range 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Mid1 Freq Middle 1 Frequency Adjust the frequency of Middle 1 mid range Mid1 Q Middle 1 Q This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Middle 1 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Middle 1 Q will result in a narrower area being affected Mid1 Gain Middle1 Gain Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 1 Frequency and Q settings Positive settings will emphasize boost the Middle 1 range Mid2 Freq Middle 2 Frequency Adjust the frequency of Middle 2 mid range Mid2 Q Middle 2 Q This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Middle 2 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Middle 2 Q will result in a narrow
67. GM GM2 Compatible The RD 700 is compatible with both General MIDI and General MIDI 2 standards When working with music files that conforms to General MIDI and or General MIDI 2 GM scores you can combine the RD 700 with a sequencer and use the RD 700 to play back the data Convention Used in This Manual e Words enclosed in square brackets indicate panel buttons Example SPLIT indicates the SPLIT button p indicates a reference page The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual USING TABUNTES Al odos 3 IMPORTANTE NO TE Sunat Nasa 5 Main Features cas 6 Panel DeSOriptOriS uu l u iii aliadas 12 Getting Ready soninn ds 15 Installing the Wave Expansion DO AA AAA AAA 15 Cautions When Installing an Wave Expansion Board ss 15 Installing SR Seres POSTA Senra a E N N A 16 Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards 18 Installation de la carte d extension Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard 19 Precautions lors de l installation de la carte d extension Wave 19 Installer les cartes de Serie K ata 20 V rification des cartes d extension audio apr s installation 21 Connect
68. GS These messages are transmitted when Modulation lever is operated 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted OPortamento Time Controller number 5 data Status 2nd byte 3rd byte bbH Address middle byte of the starting address of the transmitted data BnH 05H vvH ccH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 data vv Portamento Time OOH 7FH 0 127 ddH Data the actual data to be transmitted Multiple bytes of data are transmitted starting from the address These messages are transmitted when Portament Time is set in MIDI Tx Mode eeH Data OData Entry Controller number 6 38 sum Checksum Status 2nd byte 3rd byte F7H EOX End Of Exclusive BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 1H The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and n MIDI chamnel number 0H FH ch 1 16 data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address mm 11 the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN and size given in Parameter Address Map p 153 mm MSB ll LSB Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms These messages are transmitted when Bend Range value is set in MIDI Tx Mode Regarding the checksum please refer to p 160 Not Received when the GM Mode is OFF OVolum
69. Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap 3 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Hand Clap 4 Snare Roll Pop Kick 1 Pop Kick 2 Pop Side Stick Pop Sanre 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare 2 Pop Low Tom Flm Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Pop Low Tom Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Pop Mid Tom Film Pop OHH EXC1 Pop Mid Tom Pop High Tom Flm Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Pop High Tom Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Ride Bell Tambourine Pop Splash Cymbal Cha Cha Cowbell Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Pop Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute Conga High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 2 Shaker 3 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Mute Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Shaker 1 Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Cana RD Rock Kit R amp B Snare Finger Snap 707 Claps Hand Clap 1 Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap 3 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Hand Clap 4 Snare Roll Rock Kick 1 Rock Kick 2 Rock Side Stick Rock Sanre 1 Rock Snare Ghost Rock Snare 2 Rock Low Tom Flm Rock CHH 1 EXC1 Rock Low Tom Rock CHH 2 EXC1 Rock Mid Tom Flm Rock OHH EXC1 Rock Mid Tom Rock High Tom Flm Rock Crash Cymbal Rock High Tom Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Rock Chinees Cymbal Rock Ride Bell Tambourine Rock Splash Cymbal Cha Cha Cowbell Rock Chinees Cymbal
70. Key Shift 40 88 24 24 semitone 00 06 Daaa aaaa Cutoff 1 127 40 00 06 Daaa aaaa Master Pan 1 127 63 63 L63 63R 00 07 Daaa aaaa Resonance 1 127 63 63 40 00 7F Daaa aaaa Mode Set 0 127 00 08 aaa aaaa Attack Time 1 127 GS RESET GS EXIT 63 63 00 09 Daaa aaaa Release Time 1 127 63 63 OCommon Parameter 00 OA 00aa aaaa Pitch Bend Range 0 24 Start 00 OB Daaa aaaa Chorus Amount 0 127 Address Description 00 OC Daaa aaaa Reverb Amount 0 127 00 0D aaa aaaa MFX Type 0 65 40 01 10 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 1 0 24 40 01 11 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 2 0 24 00 00 00 OE Total Size 40 01 12 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 3 0 24 40 01 13 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 4 0 24 40 01 14 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 5 0 24 40 01 15 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 6 0 24 OSetup VK Tone Backup 40 01 16 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 7 0 24 40 01 17 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 8 0 24 Offset 40 01 18 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 9 0 24 40 01 19 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 10 0 24 A D qaress en ns 40 01 1A Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 11 0 24 00 00 0000 O0aa Percussion Harmonic 0 2 i Se 1B Ss aaaa Voice Reserve 12 0 or OFF 2ND 3RD hae 1C aaa aaaa Voice Reserve T 0 00 01 0000 000a Percussion Decay 0 1 40 01 Fe oe Sos a ee 15 PR W A SLOW FAST rae 1E aaa aaaa oice Reserve 1 00 02 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar 16 0
71. MSB but Pitch Bend Value is a signed number in which 40 00H 64 x 12 80 8192 is 0 so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H 40 00H 40 x 12 80 64 x 12 80 5120 8192 3072 If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones 8192 00 00H will cause the pitch to change 200 cents so in this case 200 x 3072 8192 75 cents of Pitch Bend is being applied to MIDI channel 11 lt Example4 gt B3 64 00 65 00 06 0C 26 00 64 7F 65 7F BnH is the Control Change status and n is the MIDI channel number For Control Changes the 2nd byte is the control number and the 3rd byte is the value In a case in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status MIDI has a provision called running status which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be omitted Thus the above messages have the following meaning B3 6400 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 6500 MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 060C MIDI ch 4 upper byte of parameter value 0CH B3 2600 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of parameter value 00H B3 64 7F MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 7FH B3 657F MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 7FH In other words the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4 and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity and the MS
72. O Q o o lt GTR BASS VOICE SYNTH No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC h EURO eee T P 236 Pulse Clav 121 001 008 130 Nylon Gtr 1 087 070 001 180 Jazz Scat 087 072 001 237 Celesta 121 000 009 131 Nylon Gtr 2 087 070 002 181 St Choir 087 072 002 238 Glockenspiel 121 000 010 132 Steel Gtr 087 070 003 182 Aahs Vox 087 072 003 239 Music Box 121 000 011 133 Solo Steel 087 070 004 183 GregorianChr 087 072 004 240 Vibraphone 121 000 012 134 Steel Away 087 070 005 184 DooBap Sw 087 072 005 241 Vibraphone w 121 001 012 135 12str Gtr 087 070 006 185 DooDat Sw 087 072 006 242 Marimba 121 000 013 136 Jz Gtr Hall 087 070 007 186 Voice Oohs 087 072 007 243 Marimba w 121 001 013 137 LetterFrmPat 087 070 008 187 Angels Sing 087 072 008 244 Xylophone 121 000 014 138 JC Strat 087 070 009 188 Beauty Vox 087 072 009 045 Tubular bell 121 000 015 139 Clear Guitar 087 070 010 189 Synth Vox 087 072 010 946 Church Bell 121 001 015 140 Searing Lead 087 070 011 190 Vox Bass 087 072 011 247 Carillon 121 002 015 141 Dist Gtr 087 070 012 191 Saw Mass 087 072 012 248 Santur 121 000 016 142 Feed Me 087 070 013 192 Poly Rock 087 072 013 249 Organ 1 121 000 017 143 Blusey OD 087 070 014 193 D 50 Stack 087 072 014 250 Trem Organ 121 001 O17 144 RD Ac Bass 087 070 015 194 Galactic RD 087 072 015 251 60 s Organ 1 121 002 017 145 RD Upright 087 070 016 195 SquareLead 1 087 072 016 252 70 s E Organ 121 003 O17 146
73. O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List Flg Bal Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 34 ENHANCR DELAY Enhancer Delay This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series Enh Sens Enhancer Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Enh Mix Enhancer Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound DelayTime Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Delay Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HFDmp Delay HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Bal Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is sent through the delay and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W o
74. Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 5 0 64 ee 90010008 Arpeggro ace ne a 0 63 FULL e 00 11 Qaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 6 0 64 OOS Wee adage AEpOgg To SL y Te 0 x ne 0 63 FULL or 00 12 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 7 0 64 093D PRES ATpPEJJLO MOETE 9 _ se 0 63 FULL 7 ee a 00 13 las Vous Wasare 0 64 00 5E Daaa aaaa Arpeggio Beat Pattern Ed 0 63 FULL E gt 00 5F Daaa aaaa Arpeggio Accent Rate 0 100 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 9 0 ai 64 00 60 Daaa aaaa Arpeggio Shuffle Rate 50 90 PUBL 00 61 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity 0 127 00 15 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 10 0 64 REAL 1 127 0 63 FULL T 00 16 va sa Joice R s ry rTi 0 64 00 62 0000 Oaaa Arpeggio Octave Range ae A R 0 63 FULL 00 17 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 12 0 64 90 93 0000 0008 Arpeggro Hold Sw a a 0 63 FULL PAS 4 A R L 21 00 18 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 13 0 64 oes Gade adaa Te gin oe tae gl Be dE s 0 63 FULL 1 10 y A R 21 00 19 Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 14 0 64 2083 A a Upper Ben a s ss 00 66 0000 000a lt Reserved gt 00 1A Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 15 0 64 00 67 000a aaaa lt Reserved gt 0 63 FULL BD i 00 1B Daaa aaaa Voice Reserve 16 0 64 00 68 0000 000a MFX Switch Oust 0 63 FULL OFF ON 00 69 0000 Oaaa MFX Source 0 4 00 1c 0000 aaaa FIXED UPPER1 UPPER2 0000 bbbb SETUP Tempo 20 250 LOWER
75. PIANO When ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed all J 129 1 settings other than the alapi Piano Edit settings p 66 St Concert 1 are switched to their status at the time the RD 700 s power was turned on The performance setting Single Mode gt p 41 is selected as the piano tone store any arrangements of N tti that tt for the entire keyboard settings that you want to keep in Setup p 56 With the RD 700 you can also make more detailed settings to make the H d sound even better match your favorite piano performances Please refer to each as needed 9 3 5 Q e Fine Adjustment of Piano Tones Piano Edit gt p 66 e Fine Adjustment of the Piano Touch Sense p 71 35 O S E x o Che x Q A Performing with the Keyboard Performing with a Variety of Tones The RD 700 provides 468 types of Tones Each one of these individual sounds is called a tone Tones are assigned to the TONE SELECT buttons according to the tone category selected Try selecting and performing with a number of different tones VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL M HIGH O O O O RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 OOO ES REVERB J CHORUS NE EFFECTS OOO PART SWITCH LEVEL dO ET TT Press ONE TOUCH PIANO This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard Press any of the TONE SELECT buttons to select the tone category GQ Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the tone T
76. Play Note Number 0 127 40 2x 24 Daaa aaaa CAf LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 41 m2 rr Oaaa aaaa Level 0 127 0 600 cent 41 m3 rr Qaaa aaaa Assign Group Number 0 127 40 2x 25 aaa aaaa CAf LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 NON 1 127 i 0 2400 cent 41 m4 rr aaa aaaa Panpot 0 127 40 2x 26 Daaa aaaa CAf LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 RANDOM L63 63R O 100 0 41 m5 rr Qaaa aaaa Reverb Send Level 0 127 40 2x 27 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 0 0 1 0 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 m6 rr 0Oaaa aaaa Chorus Send Level 0 127 40 2x 28 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 0 0 1 0 0 600 cent 41 m7 rr 0000 000a Rx Note Off 0 1 40 2x 29 0aaa aaaa CAf LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 OFF ON 0 2400 cent 41 m8 rr 0000 000a Rx Note On 0 1 40 2x 2A Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 OFF ON 0 100 0 40 2x 30 Daaa aaaa PAf Pitch Control 40 88 _ 24 24 semitone m Map number 0 MAP1 1 MAP2 40 2x 31 Qaaa aaaa PAf TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 9600 9600 cent rr drum part note number 00H 7FH 40 2x 32 Qaaa aaaa PAf Amplitude Control 0 127 100 0 100 0 40 2x 33 Daaa aaaa PAf LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 34 Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 0 600 cent 40 2x 35 Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 0 2400 cent 40 2x 36 Qaaa aaaa PAf LFO1 TVA Depth 0
77. Pre Filter Type Adjust the type of filter that will be applied before the sound passes through the Lo Fi effect PostFilter1 Post Filter 1 Type Adjust the type of filter that will be applied after the sound passes through the Lo Fi effect Post Fltr2 Post Filter 2 Type OFF A post filter 2 will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Frequency Cutoff Frequency setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Frequency Cutoff Frequency setting will be cut Frequency Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 5 1 LOFI NOISE In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates various types of noise such as radio noise and disc noise Type LoFi Type Low
78. Press CURSOR W to select 9 Utility 3 Press CURSOR gt to display the Edit screen EDIT CUtailityd Rec Setting Bulk DUNE TenProrara Bulk Dume SETUP Factory Reset Current Factory Reset All 4 Press CURSOR to select Rec Setting 5 Press CURSOR gt and the following screen will appear Rec Setting Rec Mode Local Switch Ordinarily this will be set to OFF Setting this to ON enables Rec Mode switching the RD 700 to the appropriate settings Rec Mode for recording This switches the Local Switch on and off Al though normally set to ON it should be set to Local Switch OFF when recording For details refer to About the Local Switch p 96 6 Press CURSOR amp J or W and press INC YES or DEC NO to set the values 7 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen The settings for recording to the external sequencer are now selected With Rec Mode set to ON you cannot change the MIDI TX Part settings p 60 Pressing MIDI TX does not call up the MIDI TX screen when Rec Mode is set to ON O O 3 3 A 3 Q g U SIIIAS n gt A z O ajma Q Q S 9 U Connecting External MIDI Devices Recording the Performance Use the following procedure when recording to an external sequencer 1 Turn on the ext
79. SWITCH LEVEL GS ETT 1 NEM Press ONE TOUCH PIANO When changing tones in This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard Layer or Split mode select the part for which the tone 2 is to be changed with the Press EXPANSION A or B to make its indicator light FAIR CT eve intone without pressing the ONE ES ak TOUCH PIANO button anci For details refer to PremierGranad Changing Tones in Layer and Split Mode p 44 H d If you hold down EXPANSION A or B for several seconds the name of the installed wave expansion board appears in the display p 18 9 3 5 Q Press NUM LOCK to turn on the button indicator 4 MEMO Press INC YES or DEC NO or press the TONE SELECT For details on the Tone list for Wave Expansion Board refer to the Patch List buttons to select the Tone When using the TONE SELECT buttons to input Tone numbers press and the Rhythm Set List ENTER afterwards to set the number of the owner s manual for the SRX Series Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone 39 Performing with the Keyboard Selecting Tones Without Pressing NUM LOCK You can select tones stored on expansion boards with NUM LOCK off l Press EXPANSION A or B to make its indicator light 2 Use the TONE SELECT buttons to specify the tone number Wave expansion board tones are assigned to the TONE SELECT buttons as shown below TONE SELE
80. Single mode p 41 and play GTR DOWN arpeggios as accompaniment in the left side and the melody STRUM GTR in the right UD Specify the leftmost and rightmost keys in the range to be PIANOBACK both up and down Effec tive when 5 6 notes are held O 3 Q om LLJ used for arpeggios CLAVI Styles for keyboard in CHORD Key Range A0 C8 Styles in triple meter strument backing Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the octave range in arpeggio style Octave Range A reggae type style Ef REGGAE fective when 3 notes are Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take held place Style effective for percus If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that TERG URSION sive instruments you actually play set this parameter to 0 i ing th l mp meses To have the Ls coe using the notes you p ay and HARP ae notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and SHAMISEN The payne style of a notes 1 octave lower Shamisen Parameter Value A styl i f BOUND BALL style suggestive of a d in random order i i sound in random order Changing the Order in Which Rhythmic strumming of Notes Are Played Motif the guitar in bossa nova style Hold 3 4 notes for Set the order to play the notes for the keys pressed from the BOSSA NOVA best results You can in following crease
81. Split or Layer mode For more detailed information refer to MFX Source MFX Dest p 77 You can change the multi effects type as well as a variety of other multi effects settings For details refer to Making Multi Effects Settings p 77 A O lt O 2 O mi A O un n E Q c LL du 2 0 gt Le U Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Selecting Stored Settings SETUP The RD 700 s Local Part p 31 and MIDI TX Part p 31 tone settings effect settings and other such settings are collectively referred to as a Setup Once you ve stored your preferred settings and settings for the songs to be performed as a Setup you can then switch whole groups of settings during a performance just by switching Setups You can store up to 100 different Setups The RD 700 is shipped from the factory with recommended Setups already prepared Now try actually calling up a Setup VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL GH LOW ON OFF REVERB GTID ee MULTI EFFECTS oe O HM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LPIANO EDI PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUJ H Press SETUP getting the indicator to light The Setup screen shown below appears in the display SETUP EE RHY Shuffle SPLIT LAYER Press NUM LOCK to make the indicator light Press INC YES DEC NO or TONE SELECT buttons to select the Setup to be called up
82. The sound will be modulated like a square wave SIN The sound will be modulated like a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW2 point at opposite directions Rate Adjust the frequency speed of the change Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth Sets the depth to which the effect is applied Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 63 AUTO PAN The Auto Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Mod Wave Modulation Wave TRI The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave SQR The sound will be modulated like a square wave SIN The sound will be modulated like a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW2 point at opposite directions Rate Adjust the frequency speed of the change Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth Sets the depth to which the effect is applied Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Posit
83. Y g Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard transmitted p 62 Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Part Key Transpose You can perform with each part transposed to a different pitch When the Keyboard Mode is Layer you can create a richer sound by setting the two Tones to different octaves Also if the Keyboard Mode is set to Split and you are playing a bass Tone in the lower Part you can use the Key Shift function to play the bass at a lower pitch Parameter Value TRA Transpose 48 0 48 Setting the Range for the Change in Pitch with the Bender Bend Range This sets the amount of pitch change that will occur when you move the Pitch Bend lever 4 octaves B R Bend Range 00H 00H Changing Tone Elements ATK REL COF RES You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the following four elements ATK Attack Time The time it takes after the key is pressed for a sound to reach full volume REL Release Time The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible COF Cutoff Adjusts how much the filter is opened RES Resonance This boosts the portions in the region around the cutoff frequency lending a particular quality to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Higher values pro duce a milder attack 63 63 lower values pro duce a sharper at
84. a single MIDI keyboard can play multiple instruments or change settings automatically as the song progresses About MIDI Connectors The RD 700 has the following three types of MIDI connector Their functions differ as described below MIDI MEMO THRU OUT IN For instructions on LS BAS connecting the external devices refer to MIDI N Connector Connecting the RD 700 Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here to External Equipment p 22 These incoming messages may instruct the RD 700 to play sounds or switch tones MIDI OUT Connector MIDI messages are transmitted from this connector to external MIDI devices The RD 700 s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the performance data of the keyboard controller section as well as data used for saving various settings and patterns Bulk Dump p 92 MIDI THRU Connector MIDI messages received at MIDI IN connectors are re transmitted without change from this connector to an external MIDI device Use this in situations such as when you use multiple MIDI devices simultaneously Connecting to External MIDI Sound Generators MIDI IN Sound Module A O Sosa E Q un maja O A O lt O O Q a Q ne da 5 O 2 gt xX da de n g Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard MIDI Send Channel Settings 60 When you h
85. and high frequency rotor SLOW Slow down the rotation to the specified speed the Low Slow Hi Slow values The smaller the value the narrower the band of frequencies that is adjusted with Pkg Gain Pkg Gain FAST Speed up the rotation to the specified speed the Low This sets the gain boost or cut of the range of frequencies set in Fast Hi Fast values Pkg Freq and Pkg Q Level Output Level LF Damp Adjust the output level This sets the reference frequency used in cutting the resonance sound s low end component When not cutting these sounds set this to BYPASS When Using 3D Effects The following three 3D effects utilize RSS Roland Sound Space technology to create a spaciousness that cannot be HF Damp This sets the reference frequency used in cutting the resonance a produced by delay reverb chorus etc sound s high end component 48 3D DELAY When not cutting these sounds set this to BYPASS 60 3D CHORUS Diffusion 61 3D FLANGER Adjusts the change in the density of the resonance over time When using these effects we recommend that you place your speakers as follows Also make sure that the speakers 65 OD gt ROTARY Overd rive gt Rota ry are at a sufficient distance from the walls on either side This effect connects an overdrive and a rotary in series Drive Adjust the degree of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD OutLvl Overdrive Level Sets t
86. augmenter consid rablement le timbre Precautions lors de l installation de la carte d extension Wave O Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand vous manipulez la carte afin d viter tout risque d endommagement des pi ces internes par l lectricit statique e Toujours toucher un objet m tallique reli la terre comme un tuyau par exemple avant de manipuler la carte pour vous d charger de l lectricit statique que vous auriez pu accumuler e Lorsque vous manipulez la carte la tenir par les c t s vitez de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs e Conservez le sachet d origine dans lequel tait la carte lors de l envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou la transporter O Utiliser un tournevis cruciforme correspondant la taille de la vis un tournevis num ro 2 En cas d utilisation d un tournevis inappropri la Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt t te de la vis pourrait tre endommag e Pour enlever les vis tourner le tournevis ai a dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d une desserrer EN ee montre Pour resserrer tourner dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre O Veillez ne pas laisser tomber de vis dans le ch ssis du RD 700 O Ne pas laisser la plaque arri re d tach e Apr s avoir install la ou les carte s d extension bien remettre la plaque en place O Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprim s ou aux connecteurs O Veillez
87. be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 16 STEP FLANGER The Step Flanger effect is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is returned fed back into the input Negative settings will invert the phase The effect becomes more prominent as the value is increased Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Step Rate Adjust the rate period of pitch change gt Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 17 STEREO DELAY Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time from the direct sound until when th
88. curve expands the Stretch Tune si and treble ends somewhat CR Tuning It is suitable for performances such as piano 2POW HP3 solos Q 5 Le Lid Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Making the Rhythm Settings Rhythm Pattern The RD 700 features internal drum patterns complementing Jazz Rock and other various musical genres This kind of drum pattern is called a Rhythm MEMO For more about switching Rhythms on and off refer to Playing Rhythm RHYTHM p 51 How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU k ee E APRESS Pfalocal Part Param Ss Internal Part Per 3 Utilita 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 5 Rhythm 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen EDIT CRAYtHM 4 TemPo da Pattern Sbeat Por i Rhythm Tara Rha Sets FL Por kha Set Chanae IntrorEngina 4 Press CURSOR amp Jor W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Adjusting the Tempo Tempo Specify the tempo of the Rhythm The RD 700 has only one tempo setting Once you change the setting the tempo indicated in the Tone screen and the tempo setting for the arpeggiator p 84 both change
89. is pressed the button s indicator lights up and the RD 700 switches to the mode enabling it to control an external MIDI sound generator The status of this button determines whether the RD 700 s buttons are used to control the Local Parts MIDI TX off or to control the MIDI TX Parts MIDI TX on In addition you can make detailed settings for the MIDI messages to be transmitted to the external sound generator NUM LOCK When NUM LOCK is pressed the button s indicator lights up enabling input of numerical values using the TONE SELECT buttons The button indicators automatically light according to the values set About the CURSOR Buttons N 4 CURSOR gt N7 The CURSOR buttons are used for switching screens and for moving to an item whose setting you want to change by moving the cursor Moving Between Display Pages When arrow symbols A and k appear at the upper right of the display screen it indicates that there are additional pages in the directions shown by the arrows You can switch screens with CURSOR 4 and gt alapi St Concert 1 WPS 998 RD Steins LWA 144 RD Ac Bass Navigating Among Items To Be Set CURSOR When more than one parameter is present in a screen the name and value of the parameter to be changed is shown with a box around it This box is referred to as the cursor The cursor is moved with the CURSOR buttons Cursor Additionally when mult
90. la carte d extension audio install e ne soit pas reconnue correctement Mettre hors tension de la facon d crite sous L exemple montre ce qui serait affich si la carte d extension audio SRX 02 Turning Off the Power Concert Piano tait install e dans la fente SRX A p 25 et r installer 2 di gt correctement la carte Lorsque vous le rel cherez vous serez ramen l cran pr c dent d extension audio 21 Getting Ready Connecting the RD 700 to External Equipment The RD 700 is not equipped with an amplifier or speakers In order to produce sound you need to hook up audio equipment such as a monitor To prevent malfunction speaker or a stereo set or use headphones and or damage to speakers Audio cables MIDI cables headphones and expression pedals are not included ou oiner devices always Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase accessories such as these turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections RIN COLD SLEW GND A ne O O e o E k Q to Power outlet MIDI IN Rolando sounpCanvas SC 8850 Stereo Pedal switch headphones DP 2 DP 6 etc Expression pedal EV 5 or Pedal switch MIDI sequencer etc f Monitor speakers powered Power amp Before you begin
91. mode OVibrato Delay Controller number 78 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4EH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Delay value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The vibrato delay will change in GM mode OPortamento Control Controller number 84 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 54H kkH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 kk source note number 00H 7FH 0 127 A Note on received immediately after a Portamento Control message will change continuously in pitch starting from the pitch of the Source Note Number If a voice is already sounding for a note number identical to the Source Note Number this voice will continue sounding i e legato and will when the next Note on is received smoothly change to the pitch of that Note on The rate of the pitch change caused by Portamento Control is determined by the Portamento Time value OEffect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 The Reverb Amount parameter EDIT Tone Edit Reverb Amount will change OEffect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Chorus Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 The Chorus Amount parameter EDIT Tone Edit Chorus Amount will change ORPN MSB LSB Controller
92. number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN 11 lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device receives the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IIH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H Up to 2 octave can be specified in semitone steps The Bend Range parameter EDIT Tone Edit Bend Range will change 00H 01H mmH IIH Channel Fine Tuning mm 11 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent The Fine Tune parameter EDIT Tone Edit Fine Tune will change 00H 02H mmH IIH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H Th
93. onan External MIDI Devi l yu ai id 61 Adjusting the Volume of Each Part MIDI TX Par aria adas 62 Detailed Settings for Transmitted Parts MIDI TX ononicnicnncnicononicnnonaniconananonnnananncnnncnorononnonacnncnnnos 63 Howto Make S lestat 63 Ajuste tie Volume anda 63 Settine the Amount Of Reverb and Chorus sesasine a een ie 63 petting the Key Range Wi UPR ads ata 63 Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Part Key Transpose 64 Setting the Range for the Change in Pitch with the Bender Bend Range 64 Changing Tone Elements ATK REL COF RES aaa a aaa Saa sq 64 smoothly Changing the Pitch POrtament sra siens ini 65 Changine the Pitch Coarse Tunie Fine Tinie ite iii 65 Turns Each Controller Onan OM ada tao 65 Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard WE NES 65 Making Detailed Settings for the Piano Tones Piano Edit 66 Makino TNS seta Ss E AE 66 Parameters ia 66 SO leCh ne The ANG OM 66 Changing the Width of the Sound Stereo Width ss 66 Changing the sounds Nuance UN manco rias 66 Changing the Sense of Space Surrounding the Sound Ambience 67 Changing the Amount of Reverb Effect Reverb Level ss 67 Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EQ SW EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q 67 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT
94. pattern from the choices below This setting will affect the location of the accent and length of the notes to determine the beat rhythm Depending on the Style settings p 84 some choices may not be available For details on the possible values refer to Arpeggio Style List p 142 Parameter Value 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 MUTE 01 16 STRUM1 8 REGGAE1 2 REFRAIN1 2 PERC1 4 WALKBS HARP BOUND RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUIRO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 3 4 SWING 3 4 Beat Pattern MEMO When PORTA A 01 11 and PORTA B 01 15 are selected you can use Portamento time p 81 to control the portamento attack In this case it is not necessary to have Portamento Sw set to ON Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Parameter Value Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle Accent Rate rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will sound at equal spacing As this value is increased the notes will become more bouncy as if they were dotted notes Parameter Value Shuffle Rate 50 90 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 50 50 50 50 90 10 90 10 Detail
95. ratio with which the overtones generated by the bonus D hh enhancer are combined with the direct sound The effect becomes more prominent as the value is increased Low Gain Mix Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the phase shifted sound is combined with the direct sound Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Pan Output Pan High Gain Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 Adjust the gain of the high frequency range sana ante Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency Level Output Level range Adjust the output level Level Output Level Adjust the output level 05 SPECTRUM Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by 07 AUTO WAH boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies It is similar The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change to an equalizer but has 8 frequency points fixed at locations s apus most suitable for adding character to the sound Filter Filter Type Band 1 Band 1 Gain Select the type of filter a Magai LPF The wah effect will be applied over a wide frequency Band 2 Band 2 Gain range Adjust the 500 Hz gain BPF The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range Band 3 Band 3 Gain Adjust the 1000 Hz gain Sens Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Band 4 Ban
96. recording the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps with the mic becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Mic Lvl Mic Level Adjust the volume of the microphone Dir Lvl Direct Level Adjust the volume of the direct sound Level Output Level Adjust the output level 53 OVERDRIVE 2 This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Drive Adjust the amount of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Level Output Level Adjust the output level Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Amp Sw Amp Simulator Switch Turns the Amp Simulator on off Amp Type Amp Simulator Type Adjust the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Tone Adjust the sound quality of the Overdrive effect Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 54 DISTORTION 2 This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion Drive Adjust the amount of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Leve
97. settings 4 ps a ee o value to OFF When this setting is OFF bank select messages will not be transmitted 61 ne g o Q Pan O xX x Q de Y g Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard Adjusting the Volume of Each Part MIDI TX Part VOLUME EQUALIZER PART SELECT L ID HIGH EN RHYTHM LOWER_UPPER 2 UPPER PIANO E PIANO MALLET EXPANSION FUNCTION vi vt sy ON OFF LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 A B EDIT WRITE MIDITX NUM LOCK 7 D D D D LT ES C7 ka C EE EA CJ C _ _ D 4 D SPLIT LAYER lt Oo O DEM PLAy TONE SELECT ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR BASS WINDS SYJITH RHY GM2 200 200 200 900 900 900 000 900 olo 900 000 000 000 000 000 000 ooo 000 ofo 000 888 888 888 888 888 888 888 888 EE 888 ENTER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 PART LEVEL Slider PART SWITCH When the MIDI TX indicator is on you can use the PART SWITCH LEVEL controls to control the MIDI TX parts in the same way as with the Local parts p 31 PART SWITCH When the MIDI TX indicator is on PART SWITCH determines whether or not MIDI Note messages for each of the MIDI TX parts are transmitted from MIDI OUT When the PART SWITCH indicator for a part is lit on MIDI Note messages are transmitted from MIDI OUT when the keys for that part are played When the PART SWITCH indicator for a part is not lighted off MIDI Note messages are not transmitted from MIDI OUT even whe
98. sixteen Parts played by the RD 700 s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts When connecting an external MIDI device to a sequencer or other device by assigning the Receive channel to an Internal Part you can receive MIDI messages from the external MIDI device and control the Internal Parts These parameters determine how each Part will receive MIDI messages How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MEHU Da hath Pattern Es AFFe3310 Ta Lo2al Part Param Internal Part Prr 3 Uti lit 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 8 Internal Part 3 Press CURSOR D to display the Edit screen EDIT LIrt Part idF Part gt Part UPPER 1 Tone HAL St Concert i Receive Channel 1 Wo ume ivr Pan A HF Switch EDIT Cint Part zak Part gt Parti UPPER 1 Woice Reserve a Fx Bank Select Rx Prosram Change Rx Modulation Re Bender EDIT Cint Part A Part gt Part UPPER 1 Rx Wolumes OM F gt Hold i OH F gt Pan OM TemPerament EGUAL Temperament Kew 4 Press CURSOR 4 Jor b to switch screens and press CURSOR amp or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 89 m o
99. tack Higher values pro 63 463 duce longer decay set lower values for a clear cut sound Higher values brighten the sound 63 63 lower values make the sound seem dark er Higher value makes the special quality of 63 63 the sound stronger lower value reduce these characteristics Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard Smoothly Changing the Pitch Setting the Change in Volume Portamento According to the Force Used to Portamento is a function that causes the pitch to change Play the Keyboa rd Velocity smoothly from one note to the next note played Set the change in volume that occurs in response to the force The Portamento Time setting determines the time for the used to play the keyboard velocity and the maximum value change in pitch when the portamento effect is applied to the of the change sound Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time This setting is disregarded with certain tones POR Portamento Switch Co C O This setting determines how the volume changes in re sponse to the velocity The volume is increased as the P T Portamento Time 0 127 keyboard is played with greater force when a positive Cha nging the Pitch SNS Value is used when a nega Coa rse Tune Fine Tu ne Velocity Sens tive value is selected the vol ume decreases as the keys are played with greater force If this is set to 0 the volume SR will not be affect
100. the amount of MIDI messages to be transmitted MIDI Communication Error A problem has occurred with the MIDI cable connections Check that MIDI cables are not broken or pulled out BULK DUMP Receive Data Error A MIDI message was received incorrectly If the same error message is displayed repeatedly there is a problem with the MIDI messages that are being transmitted to the RD 700 BULK DUMP Check Sum Error There is a problem with the System Exclusive message s Check Sum Check the value of the Check Sum Other Messages Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Now Transmitting System Exclusive Indicated when a Data Request message RQ1 is received The RD 700 outputs the requested data while this message continues to be displayed Now writing Bulk Dump Data Keep on POWER Indicated when Bulk Dump data is being received Once received the data is written to the RD 700 s internal memory be absolutely sure not to turn off the power until COMPLETED appears in the display Unavailable while in Rec Mode This is displayed when the MIDI TX button is pressed with Rec Mode ON When Rec Mode is ON you cannot change the MIDI TX settings To make changes to the MIDI TX settings set Rec Mode to OFF p 97 103 gt o y 5 2 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt
101. the same time move it to the right or left you can apply both effects simultaneously AS lt a BENDER D sl BENDER D Pitch Bend Modulation Adjusting the Level of the Sound s Low Mid and High Frequency Ranges EQUALIZER The RD 700 is equipped with a three band equalizer You can adjust the levels of the low frequency midrange and high frequency ranges using the EQUALIZER LOW MID and HIGH knobs respectively EQUALIZER LOW MID HIGH 7 7 soto ON OFF X O O o Press EQUALIZER ON OFF to make its indicator light The equalizer is turned on Turn the knobs to adjust the levels in each range Turning a knob towards the minus sign cuts the level of that frequency range turn the knob towards the plus sign to boost the level of that range To turn the equalizer off press EQUALIZER ON OFF extinguishing its indicator 48 The effect obtained when you move the lever may differ according to the tone being used Additionally the effect applied by moving the lever is predetermined for each tone and cannot be changed MEMO When the Tone Wheel screen is displayed the Pitch Bend Lever is set so that tilting the lever from left to right switches the Rotary effect from fast to slow For details refer to Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode p 75 Equalization is applied to the overall sound output from the OUTPUT jacks Sounds m
102. to Reverse If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Parameter Value STANDARD REVERSE Setting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch You can make advanced settings for the touch used for the keys How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SYS Len Ze Control EG z MPa ReverbeChorus Tone Edit ki 2 Press CURSOR A W to select 1 Key Touch 3 Press CURSOR D to display the Edit screen ELIT Chey Touch Key Touch MEDIUM Key Touch OfF Ff et I Ll n i lt a s REAL Velo Delay Sens El Velo Keytolw Sens El 4 Press CURSOR amp Jor W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 71 m o o 0 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the Key Touch Key Touch The setting below allows you to adjust the response you get from the keyboard when you finger the keys SUPER An even lighter setting than LIGHT LIGHT This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less forceful touch than usual so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes i
103. turned on About the Local Switch The switch that connects and disconnects the MIDI connection between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section p 31 is called the Local switch Since essential information describing what is being played on the keyboard won t reach the sound generator if the Local switch is set to OFF the Local switch should normally be left ON However if while performing you want to send that performance data to an external sequencer as MIDI messages to be recorded you then perform with the externally connected MIDI sequencer set to MIDI Thru whereby data received from MIDI IN is then output from the MIDI OUT with no changes made to the data Sequencer Recording MIDI Thru On Sound Generator Section O Local Switch Off Keyboard Controller Section In this case the data sent over two paths i e the data sent directly from the keyboard controller section and the data sent from the keyboard controller section via the external sequencer ends up being sent to the sound generator section simultaneously Thus for example even when you play a C key only once the note C cannot be sounded correctly as the sound is played by the sound generator section twice Connecting External MIDI Devices Playing the RD 700 s Internal Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device Try Playing the RD 700 from an External MIDI Device Making connections
104. 0 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 131 gt o y 0 5 a A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List 51 LOFI NOISE Parameter Value Type LoFi type 1 9 Pst Filter Post Filter type OFF LPF HPF Frequency Post Filter cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Radio Din Radio detune 0 127 Noise Lvl Noise Level 0 127 Disc Type Disc NoiseType LP EP SP RND Disc LPF Disc Noise LPF 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 2 Disc Lvl Disc Noise Level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Pan Output pan L64 63R Level Output level 0 127 1 Post Filter cutoff frequency 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 2 Disc noise LPF 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPS 52 SP SIMULATOR Parameter Value Sp Type Speaker type 41 Mic Set Mic setting 1 2 3 Mic Lvl Mic level 0 127 Dir Lvl Direct level 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 1 SMALL 1 SMALL 2 MIDDLE JC 120 BUILT IN 1 BUILT IN 2 BUILT IN 3 BUILT IN 4 BUILT IN 5 BG STACK 1 BG STACK 2 MS STACK 1 MS STACK 2 METAL STACK 2 STACK 3 STACK 53 OVERDRIVE 2 Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Amp Sw Amp simulator switch OFF ON Amp
105. 000 900 000 888 888 888 888 888 888 388 823 828 888 ENTER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ON OFF R In a LOW f r 1 4 ART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH MEMO Press PART SWITCH RHYTHM to make the button indicator an Doe ote ani ending Rhythm Patterns light play at the beginnings and The Rhythm begins playing ends of Rhythms For details refer to 2 Switching the Intro and Ending On or Off Intro Ending p 83 3 MEMO Press RHYTHM once more the indicator goes out and the You can set the RD 700 so Adjust the volume of the Rhythm with the RHYTHM slider A O lt O O ma TT A me o un Rhythm stops playing that Rhythms are not The Rhythm stops after playing the ending when the Rhythm setting is set PIRE E en o to playing with the Ending p 83 E PEED pressed Also with this setting when a rhythm is playing RHYTHM can be rapidly Set the Rhythm Pattern s pressed twice to stop the rhythm without playing the ending Patter to OFF in Edit mode Refer to Changing Patterns Pattern p 82 EMO When the Arpeggio s Arpeggio Hold is set to ON in Edit mode p 87 if an arpeggio is played while a rhythm plays the arpeggio will stop at the moment that the rhythm stops 51 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Changing the Rhythm Pattern You can select the way a R
106. 006 115 Saw Strings 087 069 006 027 Rholitzer 087 065 008 066 Perky B 087 067 007 116 ORBit Pad 087 069 007 028 Hit Rhodes 087 065 009 067 British B 087 067 008 117 Spin Pad 087 069 008 029 Wurly 087 065 010 068 Rock Organ 1 087 067 009 118 Silky Way 087 069 009 030 Hard Wurly 087 065 011 069 Rock Organ 2 087 067 010 119 Velcropad 087 069 010 031 60s E Piano 087 065 012 070 Rock Organ 3 087 067 011 120 Gluey Pad 087 069 011 032 S A E P 1 087 065 013 071 The Big Spin 087 067 012 121 Soundtraque 087 069 012 033 S A E P 2 087 065 014 072 Rocker Spin 087 067 013 122 Combing 087 069 013 034 D 50 E Piano 087 065 015 073 Purple Spin 087 067 014 123 Glassy Pad 087 069 014 035 FM E Piano 1 087 065 016 074 96 Years 087 O67 015 124 Glasswaves 087 069 015 036 FM E Piano 2 087 065 017 075 Surf s Up 087 067 016 125 JP 8Haunting 087 069 016 037 Vibra Rhodes 087 065 018 076 D 50 Organ 087 067 017 126 Earth Blow 087 069 017 038 E Grand 1 087 065 019 077 Cathedral 087 067 018 127 JX SarCarpet 087 069 018 039 E Grand 2 087 065 020 078 Nason Flute 087 067 019 128 Heirborne 087 069 019 079 Theater Org 087 067 020 129 SteppingPhsr 087 069 020 080 Tone Wheel 1 087 O67 021 081 Tone Wheel 2 087 O67 022 082 Tone Wheel 3 087 O67 023 083 Tone Wheel 4 087 O67 024 084 Tone Wheel 5 087 O67 025 085 Tone Wheel 6 087 O67 026 086 Tone Wheel 7 087 O67 027 087 Tone Wheel 8 087 O67 028 088 Tone Wheel 9 087 067 029 089 Tone Wheel 10 087 067 030 135 n O
107. 08 20000902 Repo Ie Ea AS ae Ta 63 63 ON O 00 03 Oss Fase Velocity Max 1 127 00 OF 0000 000a Receive Hold 1 Switch T 00 04 Daaa aaaa keyboard Transpose L er 00 00 00 10 Total Size e 00 05 0000 000a Part Switch 0 1 OFF ON Q 00 06 0000 000a Damper Switch 0 1 lt OFF ON 156 MIDI Implementation OSetup Tone Backup 4 GS Model ID 42H Offset Address Description OSystem Parameter 00 00 Daaa aaaa Coarse Tune 16 2 48 48 Start 00 01 0Oaaa aaaa Fine Tune 14 4 Address Description 50 50 00 02 0000 0O0aa Stretch Tune Depth 0 3 40 00 00 0000 aaaa OFF 1 3 0000 bbbb 00 03 0000 00aa Mono Poly 0 2 0000 cccc MONO POLY MONO LEGATO 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 00 04 0000 000a Portamento Switch 0 1 100 0 100 0 cent OFF ON 40 00 04 Daaa aaaa Master Volume 0 127 00 05 Daaa aaaa Portamento Time 0 127 40 00 05 Daaa aaaa Master
108. 12 OCH 44 2CH 76 4CH 108 6CH 13 ODH 45 2DH 77 4DH 09 6DH 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 10 6EH 15 OFH 47 2FH 79 AFH 11 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H 113 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 9 3H 51 33H 83 53H 15 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 16 74H 2 15H 53 35H 85 55H 17 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 55 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 5AH 22 7AH 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 23 7BH 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 SEH 126 7EH 31 1FH 63 3FH 95 5FH 127 7FH D decimal H hexadecimal Decimal values such as MIDI channel and program change are listed as one greater than the values given in the above table A 7 bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps For data where greater precision is required we must use two or more bytes For example two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7 bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 bb In the case of values which have a sign 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart In the case of two types 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 For example if aa bbH were expressed as decimal this would be aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x 128 Data marked Use nibbled data is expressed in hexadecimal in 4 bit units A value expressed as a 2 byte nibble 0a O
109. 1600 2000 2500 3150 Cho Delay Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Cho Rate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cho Depth Chorus depth 0 127 29 DIST gt CHORUS Cho Bal Chorus balance D100 0W DO 100W DelayTime Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms The parameters are essentially the same as 26 OD gt CHORUS with the Delay Fbk Delay Feedback level 98 98 exception of the following two Dly HFDmp Delay HF damp 200 8000 Hz OD Drive gt Dst Drive OD Pan gt Dist Pan BYPASS 1 Delay Bal Delay balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 30 DIST gt FLANGER The parameters are essentially the same as 27 OD gt FLANGER with the exception of the following two OD Drive gt Dst Drive OD Pan gt Dist Pan gt o y 5 a A A 129 n O ne Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List 36 FLANGER DELAY Parameter Flg Delay Flg Rate Flg Depth Flg Fbk Flg Bal DelayTime Delay Fbk Dly HFDmp Delay Bal Level Flanger pre delay time Flanger rate Flanger depth Flanger feedback level Flanger balance Delay time Delay feedback level HF damp Delay balance Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 0 500 0 ms 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 1 200 250 315
110. 2 Master Coarse Tuning NH Master Coarse Tuning LSB mmH Master Coarse Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive 11H ignored processed as 00H mmH 28H 40H 58H 24 0 24 semitones Global Parameter Control Not Received when the GM Mode is OFF OReverb Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 01H ppH vvH FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter ID width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 01H Slot path LSB Effect 0101 Reverb ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter pp 0 Reverb Type vv 00H Small Room vv 01H Medium Room vv 02H Large Room vv 03H Medium Hall vv 04H Large Hall vv 08H Plate pp 1 Reverb Time vv 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OChorus Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 02H ppH vvH FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 02H Slot path LSB Effect 0102 Chorus ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter pp 0 Chorus Type vv 0 Chorus1 vv 1 Chorus2 vv 2 Chorus3
111. 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gib
112. 27 0 127 0 6 12 18 15 15 15 15 0 127 Value 0 127 0 127 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 0 6 12 18 15 15 15 15 0 127 Value SOURCE DIRECT 0 127 OFF ON GATE DUCK 0 127 0 127 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Value 0 127 0 05 10 0 Hz note 0 127 OFF SOURCE DIRECT 0 127 OFF ON LEGATO SLASH 0 127 0 127 Value 60 4 dB 60 4 dB 60 4 dB OFF ON 0 127 OFF ON 0 127 OFF ON 0 127 0 127 Effect Parameter List 60 3D CHORUS 64 SYM RESONANCE Parameter Value Parameter Value Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 ms Depth Depth O 127 Rate LFO rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Damper Damper O 127 Depth LFO depth 0 127 Pre LPF Pre LPF 1 Phase Phase 0 180 degree Pre HPF Pre HPF 1 Fltr Type Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Pkg Freq Peeking Frequency 2 Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Pkg Q Peeking Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES Pkg Gain Peeking Gain 15 15 dB Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB LF Damp LF Damp 1 High Gain High gain 15 15 dB HF Damp HF Damp 1 Balance Balance D100 0W DO 100W Diffusion Diffusion O 64 Level Output level 0 127 1 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 10000 12500 15000 Hz BYPASS 2 200 250 315 400 500 630 800
113. 41 0000 000a EQ Low Frequency 0 1 00 03 0000 000a Piano EQ Switch 0 1 200 400 Hz BYPASS ON 00 42 Daaa aaaa EQ Low Gain 4 124 00 04 000a aaaa Piano EQ Frequency 0 16 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 00 43 000a aaaa EQ Mid Frequency 0 16 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 00 05 Daaa aaaa Piano EQ Mid Gain 0 30 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 15 0 15 0 dB 1step 1dB 00 44 Oaaa aaaa EQ Mid Gain 4 124 00 06 0000 Oaaa Piano EQ Mid Q 0 4 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB 0 25 1 05 2 02 4 05 8 0 00 45 0000 Oaaa EQ Mid Q 0 4 Mir LO 200 401 8 0 00 00 00 07 Total Size 00 46 0000 0O0aa EQ High Frequency 0 2 2000 4000 8000 Hz 00 47 Qaaa aaaa EQ High Gain 4 124 12 0 12 0 dB 1step 0 2dB OSetup Common i 1 00 48 Daaa aaaa Keyboard Velocity 0 127 EE REAL 1 127 ofrser ETAS 00 49 0000 0aaa Keyboard Sens 1 5 Address Description SUPER LIGHT LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY SUPER HEAVY 00 00 Qaaa aaaa Setup Name 1 32 127 00 4A 000a aaaa Keyboard Sens offset 54 74 32 127 ASCIT 10 10 00 01 Daaa aaaa Setup Name 2 32 127 00 4B Qaaa aaaa Key Touch Velocity Delay Sens 1 127 32 127 ASCII 63 463 00 02 Vasa aaaa Setup Name 3 32 Ne 00 4C Daaa aaaa Key Touch Velocity Key Follow 1 127
114. 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent 00H 02H mmH IIH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H 00H 05H mmH 11H Modulation Depth Range mm 11 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 x 600 16384 cent 7FH 7FH RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 When Rec Mode is ON EDIT Utility Rec Setting Rec Mode these messages are transmitted when Tone is selected These messages are transmitted when Program Change parameter is Set on MIDI Tx Part OPitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH 1H mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm l Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 MIDI Implementation System Realtime Messages Continue Status FBH This message is sent on START operation when START STOP function is selected on Foot Controller Stop Status FCH This message is sent on STOP operation when START STOP function is selected on Foot Controller Active Sensing Status FEH This message is transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 msec System Exclusive Messages Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message and Data Set 1 DT1 are the only System Exclusive m
115. 60 084 House 130 042 7 4 Fusion 160 085 Jungle 160 143 gt D D 0 3 o A un gt Owner s Manual Selecting Stored Settings SETUP p 54 No 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 144 No 001 020 RHY Setup These Setups let you enjoy performing with a session like feel while playing a Rhythm Be sure to check it out For more on Rhythms refer to the Playing Rhythm RHYTHM p 51 Setup Name RHY Shuffle RHY R amp B Sfl RHY R amp B RHY Funk RHY Pop 1 RHY Pop 2 RHY Rock 1 RHY Rock 2 RHY Groove RHY Hip Hop RHY Dance RHY House RHY Swing 1 RHY Swing 2 RHY Blues 1 RHY Blues 2 RHY Slo Grv1 RHY Slo Grv2 RHY Phaser RHY Salsa Stereo Clav Piano amp Strngs Rock Piano Piano amp Choir Piano amp Pad Christmas PhsClav Bs Quan Clav Vibes amp Glockn EP Arp Clav Tone Wheel MIDI Rhodes E Grand EP Pad Rocker Organ Soap Opera Rock Split Synth Organ Bass Rhodes Cathedral No 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 Setup Name Marcato Str Chamber Wind Brass String Slow Strings Octave Str Syn Strings Harpsi amp Str Deep Strings Organ Str Ch
116. 74 Jazz Gt 121 000 027 10 sopa oa pen En s 211 GM2ORCHSTRA 120 000 049 ed RD 165 Soprano Sax 087 071 006 so MD CE 0 oe 07 276 Clean Gt 121 000 028 166 Alto Sax 087 071 007 277 Chorus Gt 121 001 028 167 Tenor Sax 087 071 008 lt GM2 Tones gt 278 Mid Tone GTR 121 002 028 i 279 Muted Gt 121 000 029 a ds sl sia No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 280 Funk Pop Re 170 Oboe 087 071 011 213 Piano 1 121 000 001 281 Funk Gt 2 121 002 029 171 ChamberWinds 087 071 012 214 Piano 1w 121 001 001 282 Jazz Man 121 003 029 172 Pan Pipes 087 071 013 215 European Pf 121 002 001 283 Overdrive Gt 121 000 030 173 Poly Brass 087 071 014 216 Piano 2 121 000 002 284 Guitar Pinch 121 001 030 174 Rugby Horn 087 O71 015 217 Piano 2w 121 001 002 285 DistortionGt 121 000 031 175 Afro Horns 087 071 016 218 Piano 3 121 000 003 286 Feedback Gt 121 001 031 176 Triumph Brs 087 071 017 219 Piano 3w 121 001 003 287 Dist Rtm GTR 121 002 031 177 Saw Brass 1 087 071 018 220 Honky tonk 121 000 004 288 Gt Harmonics 121 000 082 178 Saw Brass 2 087 071 019 221 Honky tonk2 121 001 004 289 Gt Feedback 121 001 082 179 OB Brass 087 071 020 222 E Piano 1 121 000 005 290 Acoustic Bs 121 000 033 223 St Soft EP 121 001 005 291 Fingered Bs 121 000 034 224 FM SAEP 121 002 005 292 Finger Slap 121 001 034 225 Wurly 121 003 005 293 Picked Bass 121 O00 035 226 E Piano 2 121 000 006 294 Fretless Bs 121 000 036 227 Detuned EP 2 121 001 006 295 Slap Bass 1 121 000 037 228 St FMEP 121 002 006 296 Sl
117. ACt iu 0 Az EscaPe ki P CHOIJSExit CYES1 P1 3 de E 2 5 Press CURSOR amp to select the song that you wish to hear When CHAIN PLAY is selected the entire group of songs is played back u repeatedly While the demo songs are 3 playing back playing the keyboard will not prod Press CURSOR or INC YES to start playback of the El a i ee sound demo song When the end of the selected the song is reached playback then repeats from the beginning of the song MEMO 4 When ONE TOUCH PIANO or SETUP is Press CURSOR or DEC NO to stop a song during A ee playback stopped and the Tone screen or Setup screen 5 appears in the display Press DEC NO while the song is stopped to finish with the Demo screen You are returned to the Tone screen 34 Performing with the Keyboard Piano Performances One Touch Piano Now try performing with the piano With the RD 700 you can call up the optimal settings for piano performances with the press of a single button VOLUME EQUALIZER a O KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION MID HIGH ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE L x 3 z IM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER 7 PER2 UPI RITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK j O Ga OE D AAA OF add x SPLIT LAYER REVERB GITB AL MULTI EFFECTS TONE SELECT ON OFF OOO EC NO INC YI LIP Ca fa Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce Ge OIIIIIIIIIE PART SWITCH LEVEL OA TOUCH Press ONE TOUCH
118. Ac Upright 087 070 017 196 SquareLead 2 087 072 017 253 Organ 2 121 000 018 147 RD Fretless 087 070 018 197 MG Lead 087 072 018 254 Chorus Or 2 121 001 018 148 Fretless Dry 087 070 019 198 SH 2000 087 072 019 255 Perc Organ 121 002 018 149 Finger Bass 087 070 020 199 Soaring Sync 087 072 020 256 Organ 3 121 000 019 L us ger O00 qe 257 Church Org 1 121 000 020 151 Slap Bass 087 070 022 RHYTHM GM2 258 Church Org 2 121 001 020 152 MG Bs Oar O20 Ree 259 Church Org 3 121 002 020 153 Rubber Bass 087 070 024 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 260 Reed Organ 121 000 021 154 Wonder Bass 087 070 025 200 RDPopKit 086 064 001 261 Puff Organ 121 001 021 155 Creamy Bass 087 070 026 201 RD Rock Kit 086 064 002 262 Accordion Fr 121 000 022 156 Hefty Bass 087 070 027 202 RD Jazz Kit 086 064 003 263 Accordion lt 121 001 022 oe o RAR 203 RD House Kit 086 064 004 264 Harmonica 121 000 023 ie DOS oe AS 265 Bandoneon 121 000 024 159 8VCOMonoSyn 087 070 090 lt GM2 Rhythm Sets gt 266 Nylon str Gt 121 000 025 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 267 Ukulele 121 001 025 BRASS WINDS 204 GM2STANDARD 120 000 001 oe ee ee 269 Nylon Gt 2 121 003 025 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 2d OMA ROOM 1207 OO 7003 270 Steel str Gt 121 000 026 a e O O Owe Oa aaah O1 oa 161 FullSt Brass 087 071 002 San CMO ANALOG 420 O00 Gee 272 Mandolin 121 002 026 162 VoyagerBrass 087 071 003 209 GM2 JAZZ 150 000 2035 273 Steel Body 121 003 026 163 Simply Brass 087 071 004 210 GM2 BRUSH 120 000 041 2
119. B Level 3 Level 3 0 127 Level 4 Level 4 0 127 Parameter Value Feedback Feedback level 98 98 Type Reverb type ROOM1 ROOM2 BYPASS 1 HALL1 HALL2 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Level Output level 0 127 Time Reverb time 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS BYPASS 1 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS n O om ne c O Q Q lt 128 25 GATED REVERB Effect Parameter List 31 DISTORTION gt DELAY Parameter Value The parameters are essentially the same as 28 OVERDRIVE DELAY with Type Gated Reverb type NORMAL REVERSE the exception of the following two SWEEP1 SWEEP2 OD Drive gt Dst Drive OD Pan gt Dist Pan Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Gate Time Gate time 5 500 ms 32 ENHAN C HORUS Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Enh Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 Cho Delay Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms 26 OD C HORUS Cho Rate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cho Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Parameter Value Cho Bal Chorus balance D100 0W DO 100W OD Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 OD Pan
120. B of the value indicates semitone units so a value of 0CH 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to 12 semitones 1 octave On GS sound generators the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored but the LSB should be transmitted anyway with a value of 0 so that operation will be correct on any device Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN all Data Entry messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid so after the desired value has been transmitted it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents This is the reason for the B3 64 7F B3 65 7F at the end It is not desirable for Performance data such as Standard MIDI File data to contain many events with running status as given in lt Example 4 gt This is because if playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast forwarded the sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status and the sound generator will then misinterpret the data Take care to give each event its own status It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value setting be done in the proper order On some sequencers events occurring in the same or consecutive clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they were received For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event about 1 tick for TPON 96 and about 5 ticks for TPQN 480 TPON Ticks Per Quar
121. CITB ar MULTI EFFECTS LL PART SWITCH LEVEL OJJE TOUCH O PI SET UP OO JE qe 2 1 P ONE TOUCH PIANO MEMD ress Tones selected with RHY This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard GM2 are registered in the following order Rhythm 2 Sets GM2 Rhythm Sets Press TONE SELECT RHY GM2 and GM2 Tones Refer to the Tone List p 135 If NUM LOCK is turned on at this time the Rhythm Set Category cannot be selected Turn NUM LOCK off Press different keys to play different percussion instruments E MEMO E 4 The combination of sounds To select a different Rhythm Set press INC YES or DEC no o 2 NO varies according to the Rhythm set Refer to Rhythm Set List p 138 38 Performing with the Keyboard Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones MEMO Up to two optional wave expansion boards SRX series can be installed into ne om the RD 700 installing the Expansion Board refer to Installing the Wave Expansion Board p 15 Use the following procedure when selecting tones stored on an wave expansion board VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION L HIGH oong RI IM WWI PER 2 UPPER 1 MID ON OFF I 4 J Y Y 4 Y REVERB CHORUS MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL 4 I O D SPLIT LAYER P SET UP IANO OW E O ps e lt C A O C d PART
122. CT CLAV BRASS VOICE E o MALLET S WIND YNTH RHY GM2 o 000 200 000 000 000 000 8 9 PIANO IAN ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR BAS s 000 000 00 000 000 000 000 200 000 000 00 000 000 000 000 000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 Rhythm Tone I Set Number 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 091 100 101 3 Press DEC NO or INC YES to select the tone The TONE SELECT button included in the selected Tone numbers flash 4 Either press the flashing TONE SELECT button or play the keyboard The TONE SELECT button stops flashing and remains lit and the selected tone is set Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set Tone Numbers When selecting a Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set with the RD 700 the Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Sets are placed after Patches called Tones on the RD 700 Performing Thus when you want to specify a Wave Expansion Board Rhythm Set in terms of a Tone number the Tone number can be arrived at by adding the desired Rhythm Set number in the Rhythm Set List to the last Patch number in the Patch List 40 Performing with the Keyboard Playing Two Tones on the Keyboard The setting that determines whether one or two Tones are played by a key is referred to as Key Mode There are three Key modes O Single The same Tone is played by all keys on the keyboard This is the normal playing mode O Split One key acts as the division point the split point sepa
123. CTION RHYTHM LOWER p 2225 fk OGOR FA eo Press LAYER getting the indicator to light PART SWITCH UPPER1 and UPPER2 are lit Try fingering the keyboard 25128 Wei Bet 5t Concert 1 ASE RD Strings The Tones for UPPER1 and UPPER are layered and played To exit Layer mode press LAYER once more and the indicator light goes out Pressing Two TONE SELECT buttons Simultaneously Layer Mode Keep NUM LOCK off when carrying out this operation O hen o Ga Le A You can switch to Layer mode without pressing the LAYER button simply by pressing two TONE SELECT buttons at the same time For example if you want to layer a piano sound with strings together press both PIANO and STRINGS The LAYER indicator automatically lights up and when you begin playing the keyboard the piano and strings sounds are layered together When this is done the tone for the button that is pressed down first indicator lit in red is assigned to UPPERT and the other tone indicator lit in orange is assigned to UPPER2 The UP1 and UP2 Part names are both highlighted in the screen with both Parts being selected When two TONE SELECT buttons are selected then pressing any TONE SELECT button selects the Tone for that button and the RD 700 reverts to Single mode The procedure described above does not switch the RD 700 to Layer mode when LOWER is selected in the PART SELECT buttons
124. Calliope Chiffer Lead Charang Wire Lead Solo Vox 5th Saw Wave Bass amp Lead Delayed Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Sine Pad Polysynth Space Voice Itopia Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Star Theme Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto Taisho Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Castanets Taiko Concert BD Melo Tom 1 Melo Tom 2 Synth Drum 808 Tom Elec Perc Reverse Cym Gt FretNoise Gt Cut Noise String Slap Breath Noise Fl Key Click Seashore Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble MSB 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 LSB 000 001 002 003 004 000 000 000 001 000 000 000 001 000 000 001 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 001 002 000 000 001 000 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 000 001 000 001 000 001 002 000 000 001 002 000 001 000 001 002 003 004 005 PC 082 082 082 082 082 083 084 085 085 086 087 088 088 089 090 090 091 092 092 093 094 095 096
125. Coarse pitch A 24 12 semitone Fine A Fine pitch A 100 100 cent Parameter Value Pan A Output pan A L64 0 63R Delay C Delay time center 200 1000 ms note PreDelayA Pre delay time A 0 0 500 0 ms Delay L Delay time left 200 1000 ms note Coarse B Coarse pitch B 24 12 semitone Delay R Delay time right 200 1000 ms note Fine B Fine pitch B 100 100 cent Feedback Feedback level 98 98 Pan B Output pan B L64 0 63R Level C Center level 0 127 PreDelayB Pre delay time B 0 0 500 0 ms Level L Left level 0 127 Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 2 3 4 5 Level R Right level 0 127 Level Bal Level balance A100 0B A0 100B HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W BYPASS 1 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W 23 FBK PCH SHIFT 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Coarse Coarse pitch 24 12 semitone 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Fine Fine pitch 100 100 cent Feedback Feedback level 98 98 20 QUAD TAP DLY Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 500 0 ms Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 2 3 4 5 Parameter Value Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Delay 1 Delay time 1 200 1000 ms note Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Delay 2 Delay time 2 200 1000 ms note High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Delay 4 Delay time 4 200 1000 ms note Level Output level 0 127 Level 1 Level 1 0 127 Level 2 Level 2 0 127 2 4 REVE R
126. Cutoff Control rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents pp 2 Amplitude Control rr 00H 7FH 0 200 pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents pp 4 LFO Filter Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 100 EOX End Of Exclusive OScale Octave Tuning Adjust Status Data byte Status 7EH 7FH 08H 08H ffH ggH hhH ssH F7H Explanation Exclusive status ID number Universal Non realtime Message Device ID Broadcast Sub ID 1 MIDI Tuning Standard Sub ID 2 scale octave tuning 1 byte form Channel Option byte 1 bits 0 to 1 channel 15 to 16 bit 2 to 6 Undefined Channel byte 2 bits 0 to 6 channel 8 to 14 Channel byte 3 bits 0 to 6 channel 1 to 7 ssH 12 byte tuning offset of 12 semitones from C to B 00H 64 cents 40H 0 cents equal temperament 7FH 63 cents F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OKey based Instrument Controllers Status Data byte FOH 7FH 7FH 0AH 01H 0nH kkH nnH vvH Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast OAH Sub ID 1 Key Based Instrument Control 01H Sub ID 2 Controller OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF kkH Key Number nnH Control Number vvH Value nn 07H Level vv 00H 7FH 0 200 Relative nn 0AH Pan vv 00H 7FH Left Right Absolute nn 5BH Reverb Send vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute nn 5D Chorus Send vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute F7
127. E TOUCH PIANO or SETUP to exit GM mode p 98 When a Setup name is registered p 56 names with eight or more of the letters M N or W are not displayed correctly Try reducing the number of these letters 101 gt o y D 9 A A Troubleshooting Is the Receive GM GM2 System On Switch set to ON e Set the System Rx GM System On or System Rx GM2 System On to ON in Edit mode p 70 Does playback of the song start from some point other than the beginning of the song Song Data Not e Add a GM GM2 System On mes Played Back sage at the beginning of GM Score songs In some cases a GM Score Correctly Song Data Not Played Back Correctly Are you playing back GS Format cannot be played back correctly unless this message is received song data e Once the RD 700 receives a GS Re set message it then is enabled for GS Format This permits playback of music files bearing the GS logo GS music files However data created exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back properly on the RD 700 n Q om ne c Q Q Q lt 102 Error Messages Other Messages Error messages Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action Indication Situation Action MIDI Buffer Full Due to an inordinate volume of MIDI messages received the RD 700 has failed to process them properly Reduce
128. EOX End Of Exclusive This parameter affects drum instruments only OData Transmission Status F7H This instrument can use exclusive messages to exchange many varieties of internal settings with other devices The model ID of the exclusive messages used by this instrument is 00H 43H OData Request 1RQ1 11H This message requests the other device to transmit data The address and size indicate the type and amount of data that is requested When a Data Request message is received if the device is in a state in which it is able to transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate the requested data is transmitted as a Data Set 1 DT1 message If the conditions are not met nothing is transmitted Status data byte status FOH 41H dev 00H 43H 11H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH ssH ttH uuH vvH sum Byte Remarks FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev devdevice ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH 00H model ID 1 RD 700 43H model ID 2 RD 700 11H command ID RQ1 aaH address MSB bbH address ccH address ddH address LSB ssH size MSB ttH size uuH size vvH size LSB sum checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The size of data that can be transmitted at one time is fixed for each type of data And data requests must be made with a fixed starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 153 For the checksum refer to p 160 Not Received
129. FF LPF HPF Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Step Rate Step rate 0 1 20 0 Hz note StpRateSw Step rate switch OFF ON Key Sync Keysync switch OFF ON Threshold Keysync threshold 0 127 KSync Phs Keysync phase 0 360 degree Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 43 FORMANT FILTR Parameter Value Drive Sw Drive Switch OFF ON Drive Drive 0 127 Vowel 1 Vowel 1 a e i o u Vowel 2 Vowel 2 a e i o u Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 Key Sync Keysync switch OFF ON Threshold Keysync threshold 0 127 Manual Manual 0 100 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Pan Output pan L64 63R Level Output level 0 127 44 RING MODULAT Parameter Value Frequency Frequency 0 127 Modulator Modulator OFF SOURCE DIRECT Mod_Mon Modulator monitor OFF ON Sens Sensitivity 0 127 Polarity Polarity UP DOWN Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 Effect Parameter List 45 MULTI TAP DLY 48 3D DELAY Parameter Value Parameter Value Delay 1 Delay time 1 0 1800 ms note Delay C Delay time center 0 1800 ms note Delay 2 Delay time 2 0 1800 ms note Delay L Delay time left 0 1800 ms note Delay 3 Delay time 3 0 1800 ms
130. FO2 TVA Depth 0 127 64 63 cent 0 100 0 40 1x 41 aaa aaaa Scale Tuning C 0 127 64 63 cent 40 2x 50 Daaa aaaa CC2 Pitch Control 40 88 40 1x 42 0Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning D 0 127 24 24 semitone 64 63 cent 40 2x 51 Daaa aaaa CC2 TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 40 1x 43 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning D 0 127 9600 9600 cent 64 63 cent 40 2x 52 Daaa aaaa CC2 Amplitude Control 0 127 40 1x 44 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning E 0 127 100 0 100 0 64 63 cent 40 2x 53 Daaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 40 1x 45 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning F 0 127 10 0 10 0 Hz 64 63 cent 40 2x 54 aaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 40 1x 46 Daaa aaaa Scale Tuning F 0 127 0 600 cent 64 63 cent 40 2x 55 aaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 40 1x 47 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning G 0 127 0 2400 cent 64 63 cent 40 2x 56 aaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 40 1x 48 Daaa aaaa Scale Tuning G 0 127 0 100 0 64 63 cent 40 2X 57 Daaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 40 1x 49 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning A 0 127 10 0 10 0 Hz 64 63 cent 40 2x 58 Daaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 40 1x 4A Daaa aaaa Scale Tuning A 0 127 0 600 cent 64 63 cent 40 2x 59 aaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 40 1x 4B Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning B 0 127 0 2400 cent 64 63 cent 40 2x 5A aaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 TVA Depth 0
131. GIO TRANSPOSE WER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 3 C ER PPER 2 PPER 1 EDIT RITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK O CI a 00 NZ ja 7 PIANO SET UP ANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRIJIG PAD GTR BASS RRA 37 NTH RH 00 CIC E a fe Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce a Ca ONE TOUCH GIB er MULTI EFFECTS DIT a O Turn on the power as described in Turning On the Power p 24 2 Hold down EXPANSION A or B for several seconds A ne O O e o E k Q If appears The name of the installed wave expansion board appears in the display next to the name of the slot in which the board was installed it may be that the wave expansion board is ExPanr s10n Board Info not being recognized properly Use the procedure in Turning Off The example here depicts what you would see if the SRX 02 Concert the Power p 25 to turn Piano Wave Expansion Board were installed in the SRX A slot the power off then reinstall the wave expansion board By releasing the button you go back to the previous screen correctly 18 Getting Ready French language for Canadian Safety Standard Installation de la carte d extension Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard Vous pouvez installer jusqu a 2 cartes d extension optionnelles dans le RD 700 Ces cartes d extension m morisant des donn es Wave des morceaux et des ensembles rythmiques elles vous permettront d
132. How to Make Settings Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears You can make more detailed chorus settings When Other Prm is selected the indication of the corresponding Value changes and the value is set Refer to CHORUS p 134 EDIT MENU A SYS Ler When Chorus Delay is Set to Delay Lt Tour E s ONS COLL Delay Center ee The delay time increases as the value is raised 2 Press CURSOR amp 1 W to select 4 Tone Edit Values 0 1000 ms Beat 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen Delay Left EDIT Tone 14 This sets the delay time for the delay located at the left side of Parto Parti UPPER 1 i Tone BRL St Concert 1 s Reverb Amount 196 Chords AMOURAL El ES a LI Bart MFS 64 SYM RESOMANCE Moros POL Delay Right EDIT Tone 24k This sets the delay time for the delay located at the right side Parto Parti UPPER1 1 of the stereo field Tone bi St Concert i Coarse TUNE El Values 0 1000 ms Beat Fine Tune Portamento switchs OFF Portamento_ Times MED Delay Center Delay Left and Delay Right can be specified as EDIT Crone 44 note value lengths for a specific tempo In this case specify Parto Parti UPPER Tone 001 St Concert 1 the value of the desired note Attack Time Release Time El CULOTT El lt Other Prm gt Value Resonance a You can make more detailed delay settings EDIT Tone 44 When Other Prm is
133. Keyboard Controller Section This section includes the keyboard the Pitch Bend Modulation Lever the panel knobs and any pedal connected to the rear panel Actions such as pressing and releasing of keys on the keyboard depressing a pedal and so forth are converted to MIDI messages and sent to the sound generator section or to an external MIDI device Sound Generator Section The sound generator section produces the sound Here MIDI messages received from the keyboard controller section or external MIDI device are converted to musical signals which are then output as analog signals from the OUTPUT and PHONES jacks Units of Sound When using the RD 700 you will notice that a variety of different categories come into play when working with sounds What follows is a simple explanation of each sound category Tone The individual sounds used when playing the RD 700 are referred to as Tones The RD 700 provides 468 types of Tones Tones are assigned to each part The Tones also include various groups of percussion instrument assembled into Rhythm Sets Each key note number of a Rhythm Set will produce a different percussion instrument Part A sound generator of this type which can control multiple sounds using one device is referred to as a multitimbral sound generator The RD 700 contains a multitimbral sound generator capable of playing sixteen Tones simultaneously Parts are where Ton
134. LETED The Tone screen returns to the display Connecting External MIDI Devices Recording RD 700 Performances to an External MIDI Sequencer Now try using an external sequencer to record your music onto multiple tracks and then play back the recorded performance Connecting to an External Sequencer 1 AO CO 20 OOo MIDI Sequencer MIDIIN WIDI OUT l Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RD 700 to External Equipment p 22 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI sound device with the MIDI cable as shown in the figure below 4 As described in Turning On the Power p 24 turn on the power of each device Settings for Recording Rec Setting Rec Mode is a convenient feature to use when recording to an external sequencer When using the REC Mode function you can get the most suitable settings for recording the RD 700 s data to an external sequencer without having to make all the Part and channel settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU k hath Pattern E APRESS Pfalocal Part Parar Ss Internal Part Pre EPA MIA 2
135. Level Output Level Adjust the output level 14 STEREO CHORUS This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Filter Filter Type Select the type of filter OFF a filter will not be used LPF cut the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF cut the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Adjust the basic frequency of the filter Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range 107 gt o y 5 2 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 15 ST FLANGER Stereo Flanger This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and right It produces
136. List p 135 VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION GH ar ET E Low MID N OFF PAGED GID CRIE INTROL O RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 PART SWITCH LEVEL dO TOUCH TONE SELECT Press ONE TOUCH PIANO MEMO When changing tones in This selects a single tone to be played over the entire keyboard 65 on mode p 43 select the part 2 for which the tone is to be Press NUM LOCK to make the indicator light changed with the PART This enables input of numerals with the TONE SELECT buttons A pu pressing the ONE TOUCH y The numerical value that can be entered with each button is indicated PIANO button For u beneath the buttons details refer to Changing 9 Tones in Layer and Split 3 3 Mode p 44 a Enter the tone number with the TONE SELECT buttons The screen Tone name flashes Press ENTER The tone is set Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone When NUM LOCK is turned off the TONE SELECT buttons included in the selected Tone numbers lit 37 Performing with the Keyboard Playing a Rhythm Set Among the tones that can be selected with the TONE SELECT buttons are Rhythm Sets which are collections of a variety of percussion instrument sounds and special sound effects Here s how to select a Rhythm Set and play percussion sounds EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL EXPANSION FUNCTION GH LD o Cr 0 LOW ON OFF REVERB
137. MIDI OUT 2009 100095 meme safna FOO Om 25 l Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RD 700 to External Equipment p 22 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI device with the MIDI cable as shown in the figure below 4 As described in Turning On the Power p 24 turn on the power of each device Setting the Channels Set the RD 700 s receive channel to match the external MIDI device s transmit channel For instructions on setting the RD 700 s Receive channel refer to Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel p 90 When both channels are matched playing the external MIDI device produces sounds from the RD 700 s sound generator MEMO For instructions on how to set the transmit channel of the external MIDI device refer to the owner s manual for your external MIDI device Selecting RD 700 Sounds from an External MIDI Device Transmitting Bank Select Controller Number 0 32 and Program Change messages from the external MIDI device to the RD 700 allows you to switch Setups and Tones Switching Setups The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the RD 700 to select Setups as shown in the following table a
138. NC YES The confirmation message appears Factory Reset All Are Qu Sure CHO YES To cancel the Factory Reset press DEC NO EMO After performing a Factory Press INC YES once again to start the Factory Reset Reset you may need to re operation adjust the display contrast E When this occur adjust During the execution Now Executing appears in the display depth of the display p 28 After the Factory Reset operation is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED and the Tone screen will appear You can also restore only part of the setting to their factory status Refer to Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset p 94 27 Getting Ready Adjusting the Display Contrast LCD Contrast The characters in the display may be difficult to view immediately after MEMO turning on the power or after extended use this may also be because of The LCD CONTRAST where and how the display is situated Follow the steps below to adjust the setting affects the RD 700 display s contrast as a whole i e is a system setting This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is off EQUALIZER a O Ob KEYBOARD CONTROL EZZEL FUNCTION MID HIGH ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE WER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 2 1 A B EDIT WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK y E QA feo FO OO OOo PIANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRIN NTH RH Ca fa Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce Ce Ca CHORUS gurr
139. NSION FUNCTION O O O ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE ER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK LOWER UPPI A 1 A B EDIT CI CP OOM OO ado 00 s PIANO SET UP DEC M INC YES VOLUME EQUALIZER MID HIGH l O s ziy ON OFF E TONE SELECT REVERB J CHORUS MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL CLAV BRA VOICE a Ny er PIANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR N3ASS WINDS SYNTH RHY G 000 000 000 000 000 000 cho 000 000 000 E N S 338 338 238 338 338 HE 338 338 338 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 ON OFF o LOW sil a D PA ve Y D OIIIIIIILIM NO I O 3 lt U PIANO EDIT PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MEHU ss Rh athn Pattern Es APPe 3310 PaLlocal Part Parar Internal Part Prem EPA MAA 2 Press CURSOR w to select 9 Utility 3 Press CURSOR P to display the Edit screen 26 Getting Ready EDIT Utilits qF Rec Setting Bulk Dumre TemPorar a BUTE Dumre SETUP Factory Reset Current Factory Reset A k Press CURSOR w to select Factory Reset All Press CURSOR P 1 A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset All Erases entire menor content and restores factors Presets CHO CYESS To cancel the Factory Reset press DEC NO Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt Press I
140. OC A EQUALIZER MID HIGH RHYTH vdi vi ON OFF gt A e de KEYBOARD CONTROL CL CL O ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE N ER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 4 URSOR S x ES P 3 SPLIT LAYER ON OFF PIANO SET UP A CODE ch L PIANO EDIT PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH Press CURSOR A to move the cursor to the Master Tune parameter Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the value 415 3 440 0 466 2 Press EDIT to make the indicator go dark You are returned to the Tone screen PART SELECT LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 DEC NO INC YES PIANO E PIANO LE ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR J3ASS s if T 388 838 838 838 838 ele 38 000 000 000 000 000 cho ENJ ER 0 1 3 4 5 as EZEN FUNCTION WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK A B EDIT nu Ea Edesa EE les MO PLAY TONE SELECT BRASS VOICE WINDS YNTH RHY GM2 ri 200 200 O 000 600 E 600 600 8 9 60 7 MEMO For faster value increases keep INC YES pressed down and press DEC NO For decreasing value faster keep DEC NO pressed down and press INC YES Overview of the RD 700 Basic Organization of the RD 700 The RD 700 can be divided into two sections a keyboard controller section and a sound generator section The two sections are connected internally by means of MIDI Sound Generator Section Keyboard Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever etc
141. OCK is on Select the tone category with a TONE SELECT button then press INC YES or DEC NO to select the tone When NUM LOCK is on you can specify tone numbers with the TONE SELECT buttons p 37 44 Performing with the Keyboard Adjust the Volume Level for Individual Parts PART SWITCH LEVEL VOLUME EQUALIZER PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 A B EDIT WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK DEMO PLAy TONE SELECT 200 200 200 200 200 200 900 200 ooo 900 000 000 000 000 000 000 ooo 000 000 000 898 338 888 338 888 338 338 898 888 880 ENTER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ONE TOUCH PART LEVEL Slider PART SWITCH Parts that are played on the RD 700 using the instrument s internal sound generator are called Local Parts MEMO You can use the PART SWITCHes and PART LEVEL sliders to make la ol individual settings determining whether the sound for each part is played MIDI TX parts refer to as well as the volume level for RHYTHM part and Local Parts LOWER Adjusting the Volume of UPPER1 and UPPER2 Each Part MIDI TX Part p 62 PART SWITCH This determines whether or not the sounds in the particular part are played When a part s PART SWITCH indicator is lit on the part sounds when the keyboard is played The screen Part names are indicated in uppercase letters The volume of Parts for When a part s PART SWITCH indicator is not lighted off the p
142. OM twoata time in random order TRIPLE Notes you press will sound three UP at a time from low to high TRIPLE Notes you press will sound three DOWN at a time from high to low TRIPLE UP amp at a time from low to high and DOWN then back down from high to low TRIPLE Notes you press will sound three RANDOM ata time in random order Notes will sound in the order that two at a time from low to high and then back down from high to Notes you press will sound three they were pressed Up to 32 notes can be stored so you can create melody lines by pressing keys in the appropriate order Notes will be played in an ascend ing and descending chromatic GLISSAN DO highest keys that are pressed Sim scale between the lowest and the ply press two notes the lowest and highest All notes that are pressed will CHORD sound simultaneously The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound as a chord The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound in random order TOP UP The highest of the notes you play 16 will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated Simulated fingering of folk gui BASS UP TOP tar s three finger picking tech nique Changing the Groove Feel Beat Pattern Accent Rate Shuffle Rate Beat Pattern Select the beat
143. Overdrive pan L64 0 63R Cho Delay Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms 33 ENHAN gt FLANGER Cho Rate Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cho Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Enh Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 Flg Delay Flanger pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms 27 OD gt FLANGER Flg Rate Flanger rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Flg Depth Flanger depth 0 127 Parameter Value Flg Fok Flanger feedback level 98 98 OD Drive Drive 0 127 Flg Bal Flanger balance D100 0W DO 100W OD Pan Overdrive pan L64 0 63R Level Output level 0 127 Flg Delay Flanger pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Flg Rate Flanger rate 0 05 10 00 Hz 34 ENHANC R gt DE LAY Flg Depth Flanger depth 0 127 Flg Fbk Flanger feedback level 98 98 Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Enh Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 DelayTime Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms 2 8 OD DE LAY Delay Fbk Delay feedback level 98 98 Dly HFDmp Delay HF damp 200 8000 Hz Parameter Value BYPASS 1 OD Drive Drive 0 127 Delay Bal Delay balance D100 0W D0 100W OD Pan Overdrive pan L64 0 63R Level Output level 0 127 DlyTime Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Delay Fbk Delay feedback level 98 98 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Dly HFDmp Delay HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 35 CHORUS gt DELAY Delay Bal Delay balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 Parameter Value 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250
144. PART SWITCH to ON p 62 MIDI messages can not be transmitted if PART SWITCH is set to OFF Is the RD 700 s keyboard controller section MIDI Transmit channel matched to the connected MIDI de vice s MIDI Receive channel e Make the Ch settings in the MIDI TX screen p 60 Has the range in which sounds are to be played the key range been set e Check the settings for the LWR and UPR Parts in the MIDI TX screen p 63 as well as the Local Part Param Key Range settings in Edit mode p 88 With certain Tones for example Rhythm Sets bass Tones Timpani and other Tones will not sound if a portion of the Tone falls outside the recommended range sodipusdd Appendices Tones Are Al tered When UPPER Tone is Select ed LOWER Changes to Same Tone Tone Doesn t Change Key board Not Switching to Split or Layer Tone Doesn t Change When a TONE SELECT Button is Pressed Rhythm Not Sounding 100 Check Solution Did you call up a Setup e When a Setup is called up the cur rent Tone effect and other settings are disabled and the selected Set up goes into effect p 54 Resave required settings to a Setup p 56 Did you press ONE TOUCH PI ANOJ e When ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed the current Tone effect and other settings are disabled and settings for use in piano per formances go into effect p 35 Re save required settings to a Setup p 56 Is the Tone Contro
145. Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 10 TI 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 MIDI Implementation 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 ddd
146. RHYTHM 00 6A 0000 00aa MFX Destination 0 2 00 1E 0000 000a SOURCE PART SAME MFX PART ALL 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc Tone Category 1 0 511 00 6B 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign RHYTHM ON 1 9 00 21 0000 000a 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 0000 bbbb 43 5 21 1 1 3 1 0000 ccce Tone Category 2 0 511 00 6 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign RHYTHM OFF 1 9 00 24 0000 000a 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 0000 bbbb 1 3 5 2 11 31 0000 cccc Tone Category 3 0 511 00 6D 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER ON 1 9 00 27 0000 000a 6 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 i 0000 bbbb 423 5 2 1 1 3 1 0000 cccc Tone Category 4 0 511 00 6E 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign LOWER OFF 1 9 00 2A 0000 000a 16 51 73 2 Ba 9973 0000 bbbb 13 5 2 1 1 3 1 0000 cccc Tone Category 5 0 511 00 6F 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER2 ON 1 9 00 2D 0000 000a 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 0000 bbbb 423 8900 121 3100 0000 cccc Tone Category 6 0 511 00 70 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER2 0FF 1 9 00 30 0000 000a 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 0000 bbbb 1 3 5 2 41 30 1 0000 cccc Tone Category 7 o SES 00 71 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER1 ON 122109 00 33 0000 000a 6 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 i 0000 bbbb 1 3 5 2 1 1 3 qe 0000 cccc Tone Category 8 0 511 00 72 0000 aaaa Harmonic Bar Assign UPPER1 OFF 1 9 00 36 0000 000a T6 EEST 3 89 AN 0020 ja 0000 bbbb i ao Op Se
147. Roland k Owners Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland Digital Piano RD 700 Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s Manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference aa Roland 20 700 Copyright O 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION POSE 9 go CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK d Le ania DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to aler
148. S 114 Effect Parameter List Delay Bal Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the flanger sound that is sent through the delay and the flanger sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the flanger sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 37 CHORUS gt FLANGR Chorus gt Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Cho Delay Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Flg Delay Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate Flanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Depth Flanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative
149. SS 29 WALTZ Arpeggio Motif value parameter value parameter value parameter 0 SINGLE U P 3 GLISSANDO 26 BASS UP 7 1 SINGLE DOWN 14 CHORD 27 BASS UP 8 2 SINGLE UP amp DOWN 5 BASS CHORD 1 28 BASS RND 1 3 SINGLE RANDOM 6 BASS CHORD 2 29 BASS RND 2 4 DUAL UP BASS CHORD 3 30 BASS RND 3 5 DUAL DOWN 8 BASS CHORD 4 31 TOP UP 1 6 DUAL UP amp DOWN 9 BASS CHORD 5 32 TOP UP 2 7 DUAL RANDO 20 BASS UP 1 33 TOP UP 3 8 TRIPLE UP 21 BASS UP 2 34 TOP UP 4 9 TRIPLE DOWN 22 BASS UP 3 35 TOP UP 5 10 TRIPLE UP amp DOWN 23 BASS UP 4 36 TOP UP 6 1 TRIPLE RANDOM 24 BASS UP 5 37 BASS UP TOP 12 NOTE ORDER 25 BASS UP 6 Arpeggio Beat Pattern value parameter value parameter value parameter 0 1 4 40 SEQ A 5 80 STRUM 4 1 1 6 41 SEQ A 6 81 STRUM 5 2 1 8 42 SEQ A 7 82 STRUM 6 3 12 43 SEO B 1 83 STRUM 7 4 16 44 SEQ B 2 84 STRUM 8 5 16 2 45 SEO B 3 85 REGGAE 1 6 16 3 46 SEO B 4 86 REGGAE 2 7 132 47 SEQ B 5 87 REFRAIN 1 8 32 2 48 SEQ C 1 88 REFRAIN 2 9 32 3 49 SEQ C 2 89 PERC 1 10 PORTA A 01 50 SEQ D 1 90 PERC 2 11 PORTA A 02 51 SEQ D 2 91 PERC 3 12 PORTA A 03 52 SEQ D 3 92 PERC 4 13 PORTA A 04 53 SEQ D 4 93 WALKBS 14 PORTA A 05 54 SEQ D 5 94 HARP 15 PORTA A 06 55 SEO D 6 95 BOUND 16 PORTA A 07 56 SEQ D 7 96 RANDOM 17 PORTA A 08 5 SEO D 8 97 BOSSA NOVA 18 PORTA A 09 58 ECHO 1 98 SALSA 1 19 PORTA A 10 59 ECHO 2 99 SALSA 2 20 PORTA A 60 ECHO 3 100 SALSA 3 21 PORTA B 0 61 UTE 01 01 SALSA 4 22 PORTA B 02 62
150. TX screen p 59 active e Rhythms do not play when the MIDI TX screen appears in the dis play Press MIDI TX so that the button s indicator light goes off In Edit mode is the Rhythm Pattern s Pattern setting turned OFF p 82 Is the MIDI TX Part s PART SWITCH RHYTHM turned on e Are the Local Part s Rhythm and the MIDI TX Part s Rhythms syn chronized p 51 Is a Tone Wheel 1 10 Tone selected Effects are applied differently to the Tone Wheel than they are with other effects e Effects set in MFX Reverb Chorus MEX Source p 77 are applied re gardless of each Part MFX Switch ON OFF setting in the Internal Part Prm settings p 90 or the MEX setting for each Tone in the Tone Edit p 80 e When Tone Wheel is selected for multiple Parts it is applied to all the Parts regardless of whether the Rx Bender Switch and Rx Hold 1 Switch in the Internal Part Prm set tings are ON or OFF p 91 Is MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF set to OFF p 53 Is the CONTROL knob set to MFX Control e In Edit mode set the Control set ting in MFX Reverb Chorus to MEX CONTROL p 77 Troubleshooting Effects Not Ap plied Effects Sound Wrong No Pitch Bend When Pitch Bend Lever is Moved Sounds Come From Left or Right Each Time Key is Pressed Panned Sound is Distort ed Cannot Select the Draw Bar Screen Tone Wheel Screen In some cases where the delay timing selected in the DELAY
151. Tone 0 15 1 16 00 10 Daaa aaaa One Touch Piano Reverb Level 0 127 00 11 Daaa aaaa lt Reserved gt 00 00 00 12 Total Size 153 gt D D 0 2 A un MIDI Implementation OSystem Onetouch Piano Tone Backup 00 3E Oaaa aaaa Control Source 0 97 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT Offset 00 3F 0000 00aa Control Assgin 0 3 Address Description OFF MFX CONTROL TONE CONTROL TEMPO CONTROL 00 00 00aa aaaa Piano Stereo Width 0 63 00 01 0000 aaaa Piano Nuance 0 3 00 40 0000 000a EQ Switch 0 1 OFF TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3 BYPASS ON 00 02 0000 Oaaa Piano Ambience 0 5 00
152. Type Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK Tone Tone 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 63R 54 DISTORTION 2 Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Amp Type Amp simulator switch OFF ON SMALL BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK Tone Tone 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 63R Amp simulator type 132 55 ST COMPRESSOR Parameter Sustain Attack Post Gain Low Gain High Gain Level Sustain Attack time Post gain Low gain High gain Output level 56 ST LIMITER Parameter Threshold Threshold level Release Release time Ratio Compression ratio Post Gain Post gain Low Gain Low gain High Gain High gain Level Output level 57 GATE Parameter Key Key Threshold Key threshold Monitor Key monitor Mode Mode Attack Attack time Hold Hold time Release Release time Balance Effect balance Level Output level 58 SLICER Parameter Beat 1 1 4 4 Beat 1 1 4 4 Rate Attack Reset Threshold Monitor Mode Shuffle Level Rate Attack Reset Reset threshold Reset monitor switch Mode Shuffle Output level 59 ISOLATOR Parameter High Lvl Mid Lvl Low Lvl AP Mid Sw AP Mid AP Low Sw AP Low Boost Sw Boost Sw Level Level high Level middle Level low Anti phase middle switch Anti phase middle level Anti phase low switch Anti phase low level Low Booster switch Low Booster level Output level Value 0 1
153. UTE 02 102 AMBO 1 23 PORTA B 03 63 UTE 03 103 AMBO 2 24 PORTA B 04 64 UTE 04 04 CLAVE 25 PORTA B 05 65 UTE 05 105 REV CLA 26 PORTA B 06 66 UTE 06 106 GUIRO 27 PORTA B 07 67 UTE 07 107 AGOGO 28 PORTA B 08 68 UTE 08 08 SAMBA 29 PORTA B 09 69 UTE 09 L09 TANGO 1 30 PORTA B 10 70 UTE 10 0 TANGO 2 els PORTA B 11 71 UTE 11 1 TANGO 3 32 PORTA B 12 72 UTE 12 2 TANGO 4 33 PORTA B 13 73 UTE 13 3 HOUSE 1 34 PORTA B 14 74 UTE 14 4 HOUSE 2 35 PORTA B 15 75 UTE 15 36 SEQ A 76 UTE 16 37 SEQ A 2 77 STRUM 1 38 SEQ A 3 78 STRUM 2 39 SEQ A 4 79 STRUM 3 MIDI Implementation MDecimal and Hexadecimal Table An H is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of Exclusive messages etc are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers D H D H D H D H 0 00H 32 20H 64 40H 96 60H 1 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 04 68H 9 09H 41 29H 73 49H 105 69H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 06 6AH 11 OBH 43 2BH 75 4BH 107 6BH
154. WeA punos Gx O Gx O OZ c PIOH G O Gx O 69 y y ms 300 oyeba7 g O Gx O 89 OS O O Z9 ojnuajsos O O 99 OJUSWEHOd O O 99 L PIOH Lx O O v9 y 19 01Ju09 asodind jeJauar G O G O 6L 1211011009 asodind jeJauar G O G O 8 Z 19 01Ju09 sodind je1auey G O Cs O ZL 191 011U09 sodind jeJauar Si O G O 9L uonrss idx3 O G O LL jodued s O O 0l Sue eq G O Gx O 8 SWIN O Lx O O Z Aue geq O O 8 9 OUI OJUSWEUOd O O IS adh 1oog Gx O Gy O ad yeg Gx O Gy O z UOIENPON Lx O O 1 99 9S qUEg Lx O Lx O Z 0 Vx O S O S JBUUBYD Vx O X S A9 VI A US X HO SION O UO SION Y Y 3 KKK KKK KKH HK S910A oni Zc 0 L ol 0 L ol 0 KKK E E E E AA AAA p3191 y JOd OUO sobesson L M y pON spol SPOIN ynejaq p zyow N 94 4 94 4 pabueyo 911 911 nejaq N xK JSQUINN SION Suueyo 91Seg 00 UOISI8A Heyy uonejuaua dul IGIIN 00Z CH I pON LOOZ L JeW a1eQq Oueld leyfa 162 sodipusdd MIDI Implementation Appendices ON X ONON 110 ININO y Spo ATOd 110 ININO 8PON SOA O ONON NO ININO 2 PON ATOd NO ININO L 8PON poubisse ae sobessau esay usym olluoO XNA 10 DJ Ag S8A19991 pue SIIUSUBI G luo SPON NOD y POAI9991 LOY 10 peinoexe SI 19 SUE1 eJeq UOUM SILSUBII LAI Ji USAS N Se paziuboday Z 9 q8 99 9S SI XO Lx X X 1959y WO SAS O O Buisu sS A1 V z
155. Z CAUTION Notices About the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet IS ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING e Before using this unit make sure to read the e When using the unit with a rack or stand recom O
156. a aaaa Bend LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 32 127 ASC f 0 600 cent 41 m0 02 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 3 32 127 40 2x 15 Daaa aaaa Bend LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 32 127 ASC i 0 2400 cent 41 m0 03 Qaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 4 32 127 40 2x 16 aaa aaaa Bend LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 32 127 asc I 0 100 0 41 m0 04 Daaa aaaa Drum Map Name 5 32 127 40 2x 17 Daaa aaaa Bend LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 32 127 ASC 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 m0 05 Daaa aaaa Drum Map Name 6 32 127 40 2x 18 Daaa aaaa Bend LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 32 127 ASC I 0 600 cent 41 m0 06 aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 7 32 127 40 2x 19 aaa aaaa Bend LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 32 127 asc I I 0 2400 cent 41 m0 07 aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 8 32 127 40 2x 1A 0aaa aaaa Bend LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 32 127 ASC 0 100 0 41 m0 08 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 9 32 127 32 127 ASCIT 40 2x 20 aaa aaaa CAf Pitch Control 40 88 41 m0 09 Qaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 10 392127 24 24 semitone 32 127 Asc 40 2x 21 Daaa aaaa CAf TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 41 mO OA Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 11 coe 127 9600 9600 cent 32 127 ASC 40 2x 22 Qaaa aaaa CAF Amplitude Control 0 127 41 m0 OB Vaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 12 39 497 100 0 100 0 32 127 ASC 40 2x 23 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 in 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 ml rr Oaaa aaaa
157. a aaaa Rx Channel 0 16 10 64 00 00 Setup 100 00 00 05 6C 1 16 OFF 40 1x 03 0000 000a Rx Pitch Bend 0 1 OFF O 40 1 4 Rx Ch 1 P 1 OSETUP Write 0 1x 0 0000 000a x Channe ressure pis E s 2 40 1 Rx P h 1 These messages are transmitted when Bulk Dump SETUP function is executed 01x 09900 OURS AO ETS a After receiving Bulk dump parameters when this message is received execute Write 40 1x 06 0000 000a Rx Control Change Pe z e Setup function 40 1x 07 0000 000a Rx Poly Pressure mt e F 40 1x 08 0000 000a Rx Note Message 0 1 OFF O Status Data byte Status 40 1x 09 0000 000a Rx RPN 0 1 OFF O FOH 41H dev 00H 43H 12H 7FH 7FH F7H 40 1x 0a 0000 000a Rx NRPN 0 1 OFF O 7EH ssH nnH sum 40 1x 0B 0000 000a Rx Modulation 0 1 OFF O 40 1x OC 0000 000a Rx Volume 0 1 Byte Explanation OFF O f 40 1x 0D 0000 000a Rx Panpot 0 1 FOH Exclusive status OFF O 41H ID number Roland 40 1x OE 0000 000a Rx Expression e x dev device ID dev 10H 1FH Se Ree WOOO Ras Wee MORE 2 x a 00H model ID 1 RD 700 40 1x 10 0000 000a Rx Portamento a FF 43H model ID 2 RD 700 40 1x 11 0000 000a Rx Sostenuto 0 1 OFF O 12H command ID DT1 40 1x 12 0000 000a Rx Soft De 1 FF 7FH address i Hi 7FH address 40 1x 13 Daaa aaaa Mono Poly Mode ieee ae 7EH address 40 1x 14 aaa aaaa Assign Mode 0 2 SINGLE LIMITED MULTI ssH From FULL
158. a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is returned fed back into the input Positive settings will return the sound in phase and negative settings will return the sound in reverse phase The effect becomes more prominent as the value is increased Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Filter Filter Type Select the type of filter OFF a filter will not be used LPF cut the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF cut the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Adjust the basic frequency of the filter Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will
159. akes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times Low Level Low Frequency Level Adjust the volume of the low frequency rotor Hi Slow High Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the high frequency rotor Hi Fast High Frequency Fast Rate Adjust the fast speed FAST of the high frequency rotor Hi Accel High Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it takes the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times Hi Level High Frequency Level Adjust the volume of the high frequency rotor Separate Adjust the spatial dispersion of the sound Speed Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency rotor SLOW Slow down the rotation to the specified speed the Low Slow Hi Slow values FAST Speed up the rotation to the specified speed the Low Fast Hi Fast values Level Output Level Adjust the output level 09 COMPRESSOR The Compressor flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out unevenness in volume Attack Adjust the attack time of an input sound Sustain Adjust the time over which low level sounds are boosted until they reach the specified volume Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Adjust the low f
160. al sequencer in record mode 8 Press INC YES to transmit the settings To cancel the Bulk Dump press DEC NO The message Now Executing appears in the display during transmission of the data 9 After the transmitting is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED You are returned to the Edit screen 10 Stop the external sequencer Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Bulk Dump SETUP 6 Press CURSOR P A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dume SETUP SETUP I SETUP 194 send Ssstem YES To send PresscCki To cancels Press 4 Parameter Value Setup number for the first Setup to From be transmitted T Setup number for the last Setup to be O transmitted Determines whether the system set Send System tings are to be transmitted YES or not NO 7 Press CURSOR A W Jand INC YES DEC NO to set the transmitted SETUPs 8 Press CURSOR P A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dume SETUP T send Systemi Send Ok CHO EYES 9 Put the external sequencer in record mode 10 Press INC YES to transmit the settings To cancel the Bulk Dump press DEC NO A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk Dume SETUP Hol Executin i 1466 To cancel Press CHOI 11 After the transmitting is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED You are returned to the Edit screen 12 Stop the external sequ
161. also change the name of a Setup You can store 100 Setups on the RD 700 VOLUME EQUALIZER O O O O KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION MID HIGH ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE OO 0 RHYTHM LOWER UPPI ITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK be FOO OO OO TONE SELECT SPLIT LAYER ED GIB ee MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF OOO PIANO SET UP o L piano EDIT PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH 248 3 6 910 5 3 Press WRITE getting the indicator to light The Setup screen appears a New Setup Name BBLS P1ian0 S trs E Destination Cal Chase Dest Ho Lw i Chanae Hama CYESIiWrite Mol Exit Press CURSOR A to move the cursor to the destination Setup name n Q c LL du 2 0 gt Le U Select the save destination Setup either by pressing INC YES or DEC NO When using the TONE SELECT buttons to input Setup numbers press ENTER afterwards to set the number Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the new Setup name CE Concert J HAS Stage Piano Ch Write CY Chanae Dest Ho CA Insert CE Delete 56 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Press CURSOR D to move the cursor to the positions where the characters are to be input Press INC YES or DEC NO to enter the characters The following characters are available Space A Z a z 0 9 lt gt 0 _ 1 When EXPANSION A is pres
162. alues If you keep on holding down one button while pressing the other the value change accelerates Use ENTER to finalize a value or execute an operation 12 PART SELECT buttons Selects the part for which the tone is to be selected p 44 13 EXPANSION A B This selects a sound from a wave expansion board sold separately p 39 14 FUNCTION EDIT Press this button when you wish to adjust various settings p 68 WRITE Stores the current settings to Setup p 56 MIDI TX Puts the RD 700 in control of the external MIDI sound generator p 59 NUM LOCK You can input numerical values with the TONE SELECT buttons when this button is lit p 37 In addition you can listen to the demo songs by simultaneously pressing this button and WRITE DEMO PLAY p 34 15 TONE SELECT buttons Pressed to select tones p 36 You can also input numerical values with these buttons when the NUM LOCK button is on NUM LOCK turns on automatically in the Edit and other screens enabling input of numerical values with the buttons MODULATION A 4 BENDER gt Pitch Bend Modulqtion Lever This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato p 48 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel 1 GND Terminal Connect using a grounded cable optional as conditions require In some cases depending on the environment in which the unit is installed the surface of the panel may sometimes feel
163. amento Sw parameter EDIT Tone Edit Portament Sw will change O71 001 020 Tone BRASS WINDS 60 179 072 001 020 Tone VOICE SYNTH 80 199 AE E SR ne OSostenuto Controller number 66 093 000 001 SRX Patch 001 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 42H vvH 120 001 057 GM Rhythm 204 212 121 000 001 128 GM Patch 213 468 n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OModulation Controller number 1 J ee so Status 2nd byte 3rd byte OSoft Controller number 67 ERA OLT WH Status 2nd byte 3rd byte n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 BnH 43H E Fi Modulation dept L K n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON Not received when the Rx Modulation EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Modulation is OFF OResonance Controller number 71 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte OPortamento Time Controller number 5 me TE H n VV Status 2nd byte 3rd byte n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pni Hom AN vv Resonance value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Portamento Time 00H 7FH 0 127 The Resonanse parameter EDIT Tone Edit Resonance will change The Portament Time parameter EDIT Tone Parameter Portament Time will change n O om ne c Q Q Q lt 146 MIDI Implementation ORelease Time Cont
164. amplifier and headphones or speakers may be SN are capable of producing sound levels that could e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for or are a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration AAA ANA AAN As e Do not allow any objects e g flammable material S e This unit should be used only with a rack or stand coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft that is recommended by Roland A drinks etc to penetrate the unit e Use only the attached power supply cord Also the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device e In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit WARNING CAUTION e Protect the unit from strong impact e The unit should be located so that its location or Do not drop it position does not interfere with its proper venti lation an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension Do not force the unit s
165. ance D100 0W DO 100W Delay 4 Delay time 4 0 900 ms note Level Output level 0 127 Feedback 1 Feedback 1 98 98 Feedback 4 Feedback 4 98 98 N HF Damp 1 HF Damp 1 200 8000 Hz 50 LOFI COMPRESS BYPASS 1 Parameter Value HF Damp 4 HF Damp 4 o Type LoFi type 1 9 Threshold Threshold level 0 127 ee AS Oe ee Output pan 1 2 3 L64 63R PostFltr 1 Post filter 1 type TYPE1 6 reia Mario 0 127 PostFltr 2 Post filter 2 type OFF LPF HPF Frequency Post filter cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gen 15 415 dB Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W de San Mga gAn ee revel Ouipulisval 0 197 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Pan Output pan L64 63R 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Level Output level 0 127 Hz BYPA L S nd s si 1 Post filter cutoff frequency 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 47 SHUFFLE DELAY Parameter Value Delay Delay time 0 1800 ms note Shuffle Shuffle rate 0 100 Accel Acceleration 0 15 Feedback Feedback 98 98 HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Pan A Pan A L64 63R Pan B Pan B L64 63R Level Bal Level balance A100 0B A0 100B Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 125
166. ap Bass 2 121 000 038 gt 229 EP Legend 121 003 006 297 Synth Bass 1 121 000 039 O 230 EP Phase 121 004 006 298 SynthBass101 121 001 039 231 Harpsichord 121 000 007 299 Acid Bass 121 002 039 a 232 Coupled Hps 121 001 007 300 Clavi Bass 121 003 039 A 233 Harpsi w 121 002 007 301 Hammer 121 004 039 O 234 Harpsi o 121 003 007 302 Synth Bass 2 121 000 040 136 No 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 Tone Name Beef FM Bass RubberBass 2 Attack Pulse Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Str PizzicatoStr Harp Yang Qin Timpani Orche str Orchestra 60s Strings Slow Strings Syn Strings1 Syn Strings3 Syn Strings2 Choir Aahs Chorus Aahs Voice Oohs Humming SynVox Analog Voice OrchestraHit Bass Hit 6th Hit Euro Hit Trumpet Dark Trumpet Trombone Trombone 2 Bright Tb Tuba MutedTrumpet MuteTrumpet2 French Horns Fr Horn 2 Brass 1 Brass 2 Synth Brass1 Pro Brass Oct SynBrass Jump Brass Synth Brass2 SynBrass sfz Velo Brass 1 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wa
167. arity Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation will be the same or the opposite INVERSE The left and right phase will be opposite When using a mono source this spreads the sound SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select this when inputting a stereo source Manual Adjusts the center frequency to which the phase effect is applied Rate Phaser Rate Adjust the frequency of modulation Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth Phaser Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Resonance Phaser Resonance Adjust the amount of feedback for the phaser Higher settings will give the sound a stronger character Cross Fbk Cross Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the phaser sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Step Rate Adjust the frequency of pitch change gt Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note 115 gt o E 0 a A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List StpRateSw Step Rate Switch This setting determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF Mix Mix Level Adjust the volume of the phase shifted soun
168. art does not which any Tone Wheel sound even when the keyboard is played The screen Part names are setting 1 10 is selected A indicated in lowercase letters STDs oo ui PART LEVEL sliders PART SWITCH will turn on or off each time you press it 9 3 5 Q PART LEVEL Slider Adjusts the volume of an individual Part When a part s PART SWITCH indicator is not lighted no sound is produced for the part even when the slider is moved MEMO Use the VOLUME slider when adjusting the overall volume level p 25 45 O S E x o Che x Q A Performing with the Keyboard Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE N 46 You can transpose performances without changing the keys you are playing as well as change the pitch by an octave This feature is called Transpose This is a convenient feature to use when you want to match the pitch of the keyboard performance to a vocalist s pitch or perform using the printed music for trumpets or other transposed instruments The reference Transpose setting is C4 and the setting can be adjusted in semitone units in a range of 41 0 42 EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL GH 20000 C CEAD H as ED GE Oo e EU Hold down TRANSPOSE for several seconds A screen such as the following appears and the current value of the setting is displayed Trahsrose AS y PA od Hold down TRANSPOSE and press a key
169. ave Modulation wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Rate Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 gt o y 0 a A A 133 Effect Parameter List gt Making Reverb Settings p 78 Parameter refers to the parameter assigned to lt Other Prm gt Value refers to the values that can be set in Value Reverb Parameters REVERB Parameter Type Reverb Delay type HF Damp Reverb Delay HF damp Feedback Delay feedback Value ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 DELAY PAN DLY 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE Parameter Size Diffusion Density LF Damp LF Gain HF Damp HF Gain Size Reverb diffusion Reverb density LF damp frequency LF damp gain HF damp frequency HF damp gain Value 1 8 0 127 0 127 50 4000 Hz 1 36 0 dB 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12500 Hz 36 0 dB 1 50 64 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Hz n O om ne c O Q Q lt 134 Setting Chorus and Delay p 78 Parameter refers to the parameter assigned to lt Other Prm gt Value refers to the values that can be set in Value Chorus Parameters Parameter Value Depth Chorus dept
170. ave finished connecting the external MIDI device match the MEMO keyboard s Transmit channel and the Receive channel for each of the You can save the external MIDI sound generator s Parts Sounds is produced when the MIDI keyboard s Transmit channels for the sending device the RD 700 and the receiving device the channel to a Setup p 56 external MIDI sound generator are set to the same MIDI channel EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION GH PER MID OW ON OFF RHYTHM LOWER UP 2 UPPER 1 REVERB J CHORUS ee EFFECTS Sos PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH Press MIDI TX getting the indicator to light Te or instructions on setting The MIDI Tx screen appears each of the external MIDI sound generator s Part s If Ch doesn t appear on screen press CURSOR d several times to Receive channel refer to display the following screen the owner s manual for each device 5174 PERU Ch MSE LZE PC NEM Part names for Parts in which PART SWITCH is set to OFF appear in the display inlowercase letters Press CURSOR d a DP or w to move the cursor i dl then press INC YES or DEC NO to set the Transmit MIDI messages for Parts channel Ch for each part with the PART SWITCH set to OFF are not transmitted pan sm E UP1 UPPER1 UP2 UPPER2 RD 700 performance When Rec Mode is set to data is sent over a select ON in the Utility Rec AAN chau Set
171. ay become distorted when certain EQUALIZER settings are used In such instances use the PART LEVEL sliders or other controls to lower Part volumes or in Edit mode adjust the Master Volume settings in the System p 70 to lower the overall volume level NEM You can make more detailed settings for the equalizer For details refer to Changing the Equalizer Frequency Settings Freq Q p 74 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Creating Arpeggios from the Chords You Play ARPEGGIO Just by playing a chord you can play an arpeggio a chord that is played one MEMO note at a time using the notes making up that chord You can specify the Part and key range for arpeggios to be played For details refer to Setting the Key Range for the Arpeggio Performances Key Range p 84 EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL EXPANSION FUNCTION GH UE El LOW CED GU A O L Co LIL EJ E e 6 E eee PART SWITCH LEVEL TOUCH 1 MEMO Press ARPEGGIO getting the indicator to light o ou performances that use arpeggios to an external 2 MIDI device from MIDI Press the key as shown in the figure below OUT When transmitting set Arpeggio s Dest Part setting to ALL in Edit mode p 84 i MEMO C G At the factory settings arpeggios stop playing J when you release the keys but you can also have C E G E C E GE A O lt O O ma TT
172. bH has the value of a x 16 b lt Example1 gt What is the decimal expression of 5AH From the preceding table SAH 90 lt Example2 gt What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given as hexadecimal for each 7 bits From the preceding table since 12H 18 and 34H 52 18 x 128 52 2356 lt Example3 gt What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03 09 0D From the preceding table since OAH 10 03H 3 09H 9 ODH 13 10 x 16 3 x 16 9 x 16 13 41885 lt Example4 gt What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 1258 16 1258 16 78 10 16 4 14 O sm 4 Since from the preceding table 0 00H 4 04H 14 0EH 10 0AH the result is 00 04 OE OAH 159 gt D D 0 2 A un n O om ne c O Q Q lt MIDI Implementation MExamples of Actual MIDI Messages lt Example1 gt 92 3E 5F 9n is the Note on status and n is the MIDI channel number Since 2H 2 3EH 62 and 5FH 95 this is a Note on message with MIDI CH 3 note number 62 note name is D4 and velocity 95 lt Example2 gt CE 49 CnH is the Program Change status and n is the MIDI channel number Since EH 14 and 49H 73 this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH 15 program number 74 Flute in GS lt Example3 gt EA 00 28 EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status and n is the MIDI channel number The 2nd byte 00H 0 is the LSB and the 3rd byte 28H 40 is the
173. braslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 MuteTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 GM2 JAZZ High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 2 EXC7 EXC7 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Standard SN1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Real Tom 4 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC6 EXC6 GM2 BRUSH High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kick 2 EXC7 EXC7 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Swirl Brush Slap1 Brush Swirl Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 P
174. by pressing the damper pedal p 76 And the digital equalizer lets you make an even wider range of Tone adjustments p 73 Equipped With Organ Tone Wheel Sound Generator For organ Tones the RD 700 comes equipped with an organ Tone wheel sound generator used in the Roland Combo Organ VK 7 This sound generator lets you recreate organ sounds changing the level of each footage p 75 Rhythm and Arpeggiator Functions You can play back Rhythm patterns and perform arpeggios with the press of a single button Enjoy a variety of performance techniques with backing using realistic drum sounds for a real session feel arpeggios and cutting you get just by playing the chords and more p 49 p 51 Fast MIDI Control You can also control various functions such as adjusting volume levels and selecting Tones simply and easily from an external MIDI device This provides fast and intuitive control when using the keyboard on stage p 59 Expandability You can install up to two SRX Series Wave Expansion Boards a favorite for use with Roland s XV Series Starting with the SRX 02 Concert Grand Tone you can enjoy performing with the most up to date Tones available as they are continually released p 15 Sophisticated Design The great looking titanium colored instrument body makes for a top class onstage image With simple rear cable connections the design also shows that due consideration has been given to operability
175. ct parameters When Other Prm is selected the indication of the corresponding Value changes and the value is set Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 104 Multi effects are not applied to parts that have the Internal Part Prm MFX Switch set to OFF in Edit mode MEMO With some types of multi effects lowering the volume of the Part to which the multi effects are added may end up changing the amount of the effect applied In such cases adjust the MFX lt Other Prm gt Level Some multi effects have parameters that can be specified in terms of a note value for example the STEP RATE parameter of 16 STEP FLANGER When such parameters are assigned to MEX Control and lt Other Prm gt and a note value has been supplied for the value you won t be able to change the value using the CONTROL knob If you want to change the value with the knob use numeric values when making settings MED Use caution before setting the Feedback parameter to its maximum or minimum values since such settings may cause the sound to play continuously 77 m o o 0 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Making Reverb Settings Reverb adds the reverberation characteristics of halls or auditoriums Four different types are offered so you can select and use the type that suits your purpose NEM You can set the amount of reverb applied separately for each individual part
176. d Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Making abrupt changes in the settings values may cause the sound to become distorted or overly loud Carefully monitor volume levels while making the settings Higher values produce a milder attack lower Attack Time 63 63 values produce a sharper attack Higher values produce longer decay set lower Release Time 63 63 values for a clear cut sound Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT o ee values brighten the sound lower val Cutoff 63 63 ues make the sound seem darker Higher value makes the special quality of Resonance 63 63 the sound stronger lower value reduce these characteristics With some Tones the effect does not work as intended Changing the Bend Range Bend Range This sets the amount of pitch change that will occur when you move the Pitch Bend lever 2 octaves Parameter Value Bend Range Precise Modification of Chord Sonorities Stretch Tune Changes the pitch using the stretch tuning method typically used on acoustic pianos This makes high range sounds slightly higher in pitch and low range sounds slightly lower in pitch With a setting of OFF the Patch s tuning will be equal temperament A setting of 3 will produce the greatest difference in the pitch of the low and high ranges DE is the standard tuning curve 1 This tuning
177. d relative to the direct sound Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 42 KEYSYNC FLANG Keysync Flanger Keysync Flanger controls the Flanger by resetting the effect at the volume of the sound input to the effects device restarting from the same pitch each time the Flanger is reset This parameter lets your playing dynamics on the keyboard control the flanger effect Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until the flanger sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation frequency of the flanger sound gt Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger sound Feedback Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Higher settings will produce a more distinctive sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the flanger sound Filter Filter Type OFF A filter will not be used LPF The frequency
178. d 4 Gain Adjust the 1250 Hz gain Manual Adjust the frequency from which the effect is applied Band 5 Band 5 Gain Adjust the 2000 Hz gain Peak Adjust the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the area Band 6 Band 6 Gain of the frequency Lower settings will cause the effect to be SERGE applied in a broad area around the frequency Higher settings Band 7 Band 7 Gain will cause the effect to be applied in a more narrow range Adjust the 4000 Hz gain Rate Band 8 Band 8 Gain Adjust the frequency of the modulation Adjust the 8000 Hz gain Depth Q Adjust the depth of the modulation Simultaneously adjust the width of the adjusted areas for all the Level Output Level frequency bands Adjust the output level gt o y 0 2 A A 105 N Q om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List 08 ROTARY The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches Low Slow Low Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the low frequency rotor Low Fast Low Frequency Fast Rate Adjust the fast speed FAST of the low frequency rotor Low Accel Low Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it t
179. d MFX Parameter 29 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 79 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 30 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 7D 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 31 12768 52768 20000 20000 01 01 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 32 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 00 01 05 Total Size OSetup Common Chorus Offset Address Description 00 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 2 00 01 Daaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 00 02 0000 0O0aa Chorus Output Select 0 2 MAIN REV MAIN REV 00 03 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 1 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 07 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 2 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 OB 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 3 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 OF 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 4 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 13 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 5 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 17 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 6 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 1B 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 7 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 1F 0000 aaaa
180. d how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 Panel Descriptions Front Panel VOLUME EQUALIZER MID HIGH Ollittittia Ollittittita 1 VOLUME Slider Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack p 25 2 EQUALIZER ON OFF Turns the equalizer on off p 48 LOW knob Adjusts the sound s low frequency range MID knob Adjusts the sound s midrange frequencies HIGH knob Adjusts the sound s high frequency range 3 REVERB knob Adjusts the amount of reverb p 47 4 CHORUS knob Adjusts the amount of chorus p 47 5 MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Adjusts the way that effects are applied p 53 ON OFF Switches the multi effects on off p 53 KEYBOARD CONTROL LOW s LJ ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE e f 1 ON OFF RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 9 j k SPLIT LAYER PIANO SET UP PART SWITCH LEVEL L_PIANO EDIT
181. d rotating it counterclockwise applies less reverb Adding Breadth to the Sound CHORUS knob You can apply a chorus effect to the notes you play on the keyboard By adding the chorus effect you can give the sound greater dimension with more fatness and breadth Adjust the CHORUS knob to select the amount of chorus effect to be applied Rotating the knob clockwise applies a deeper chorus and rotating it counterclockwise applies less chorus MEMD For more detailed information about the reverb effect settings refer to Making Reverb Settings p 78 When the Tone Edit s Reverb Amount setting in the Edit mode is set to 0 then no effect is applied even when the REVERB knob is turned p 80 Em For more detailed g information about the 2 iy chorus effect settings refer 9 to Setting Chorus and 3 Delay p 78 a When the Tone Edit s Chorus Amount setting in the Edit mode is set to 0 then no effect is applied even when the CHORUS knob is turned p 80 47 O S E x o Che x Q A Performing with the Keyboard Changing the Sound s Pitch in Real Time Bender Modulation Lever While playing the keyboard move the lever to the left to lower the pitch or to the right to raise the pitch This is known as Pitch Bend You can also apply vibrato by manipulating the lever away from you This is known as Modulation If you move the lever away from you and at
182. dback level 98 98 Phase Phase 0 180 degree L 2 TREMOLO CHO Step Rate Step rate 0 10 20 00 Hz note Parameter Value Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB PreDelay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Cho Rate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Cho Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Phase Tremolo phase 0 180 degree Trem Rate Tremolo rate 0 05 10 00 Hz 1 Ye STEREO DELAY Trem Sep Tremolo separation 0 127 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Delay L Delay time left 0 0 500 0 ms Delay R Delay time right 0 0 500 0 ms Feedback Feedback level 98 98 L 3 SPACE D Mode Feedback mode NORMAL CROSS Parameter Value Phase L Feedback phase left NORMAL INVERT Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Phase R Feedback phase right NORMAL INVERT Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 BYPASS 1 Phase Phase 0 180 degree Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 14 STEREO CHORUS Parameter Value Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 Phase Phase
183. dea to use the Output Level to adjust the difference in volume between when Distortion is applied and when it is not applied Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Amp Type Amp Simulator Type Select the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 104 Effect Parameter List 04 PHASER Pan Output Pan Adjust the st location of the output d L64 is far left 0 A phaser adds a phase shifted sound to the direct sound j res aa a OS en iS x i is center and 63R is far right producing a twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth Level Output Level Adjust th level Manual djust the output leve Adjust the basic frequency from which the sound will be 06 ENHANCER modulated The Enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high Rate frequencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Adjust the frequency period of modulation Sens Sensitivity Depth CR Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Adjust the depth of modulation Mix Mix Level bala Adjust the
184. e Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Ratio Compression Ratio Adjust the compression ratio Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range 121 gt o y 0 5 2 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 57 GATE The Gate effect cuts the reverb s delay according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device Use this in situations such as when you want to force a decrease in the decay sound Key Selects the input of the sound that acts as the trigger closing the gate When set to SOURCE the gate is closed by the sound input to the Multi effects When set to DIRECT the gate is closed by the direct sound that bypasses the multi effects Threshold Key Threshold Sets the volume level at which the gate begins to close Monitor Key Monitor Determines whether the sound used as the gate trigger is output ON or not OFF Mode GATE Gate Reverb When the source volume falls below a certain level the gate closes giving the effect of the reverb sound being cut with a gate reverb DUCK Ducking Reverb When the source volume gets high enough the gate closes which gives a duc
185. e Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 These messages are transmitted when PART VOLUME Slider is operated gt D D 0 5 2 A nu 151 n O om ne c Q Q Q lt MIDI Implementation OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OAH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Panpot 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right These messages are transmitted when Pan value is set in MIDI Tx Mode OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON These messages are transmitted when Damper pedal is operated OPortamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON These messages are transmitted when Portament Swicth is set in MIDI Tx Mode OSostenuto Controller number 66 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 42H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON These messages are transmitted when Foot Contolloer 2 is operated in One Touch Piano Mode OSoft Controller number 67 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 43H vvH n MIDI c
186. e Coarse Tune parameter EDIT Tone Edit Coarse Tune will change 00H 05H mmH 11H Modulation Depth Range mm ll 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 600 16384 cent The modulation depth range will change in GM mode 7FH 7FH RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Parameter values that were previously set will not change mm ll ignored Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 Not received when the Rx Program Change parameter EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Program Chanage is OFF OPitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH 1H mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm l Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 Not received when the Rx Bender parameter EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Bender is OFF 147 gt D D 0 5 2 A nu n O om ne c Q Q Q lt MIDI Implementation mChannel Mode Messages All Sounds Off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When this message is received all notes currently sounding on the corresponding channel will be turned off Reset All Controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When t
187. e is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices e Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach Placement e Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference e This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such recelvers e Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit e To avoid possible breakdown do not use
188. e left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase 108 Effect Parameter List Mode Feedback Mode Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Phase L Feedback Phase Left Select the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Phase R Feedback Phase Right Select the phase of the right delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting
189. e notes from C through B Though the settings are made while working with one octave the fine adjustments will affect all octaves By making the appropriate Scale Tune settings you can obtain a complete variety of tuning methods other than equal temperament As examples three possible types of scale setting are explained below OEqual Temperament This method of tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts It is currently the most widely used form of tuning especially in occidental music On the RD 700 the default settings for the Scale Tune feature produce equal temperament OJust Temperament Tonic of C The principal triads resound much more beautifully than with equal temperament but this benefit can only be obtained in one key If transposed the chords tend to become ambiguous The example given involves settings for a key in which C is the keynote OArabian Scale By altering the setting for Scale Tune you can obtain a variety of other tunings suited for ethnic music For example the settings introduced below will set the unit to use the Arabian Scale Example Settings Note name Equal Temperament Just Temperament Key tone C Arabian Scale C 0 0 6 C 0 8 45 D 0 4 2 Eb 0 16 12 E 0 14 51 F 0 2 8 F 0 10 43 G 0 2 4 G 0 14 47 A 0 16 0 Bb 0 14 10 B 0 12 49 The values in the table are given in cents Convert these values to hexadecimal and transmit them as Exclusive data For example t
190. e on switching the Arpeggiator on and off refer to Creating Arpeggios from the Chords You Play ARPEGGIO p 49 How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MEHU k Rhath Pattern Er APPE S310 T Local Part Parar Ss Internal Part Per 3 1iti111t3 2 Press CURSOR A W to select 6 Arpeggio 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen ELIT Arre 3310 TenPo Dest Part Key Range mt ale Octave Rane El Hotif SINGLE UPS DOW Best Pattern Accent Rates shuffle Rate Melocita ArrPesa 310 Hold 4 Press CURSOR d Jor D to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 83 m o o 0 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Adjusting the Tempo Tempo Setting the Way Arpeggios are This sets the speed of the arpeggio Played S tyle This sets the style of the arpeggio Select from the following 45 options The RD 700 has one tempo setting You can change this a A alternatively you can change the rhythm s tempo setting p A 82 1 4 The rhythm will be divid ed in quarter notes The rhythm will be divid ed in quarter note trip
191. e set automatically Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Messages Oldentity Request Message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 01H F7H FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 1 32 the initial value is 10H 17 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 01H Sub ID 2 Identity Request F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this message is received Identity Reply message p 153 will be transmitted OGM1 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 01H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 1 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages are received this instrument will turn to the GM mode Not received when the Rx GM1 System On parameter EDIT System Rx GM1 System ON is OFF MIDI Implementation OGM2 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 03H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 03H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 2 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages is received this instrument will turn to the GM mode Not received when the Rx GM2 System On parameter EDIT System Rx GM2 System ON is OFF OGM System Off Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7F 09H 02H F7H
192. ed including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada This owner s manual is printed on recycled paper Roland Corporation 02565478 04 5 9N
193. ed the head of the screw may be stripped O To remove a screw rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise To tighten a screw rotate bosen EN tighten the screwdriver clockwise O Be careful that the screws you remove do not drop into the interior of the RD 700 Do not leave the rear panel cover removed After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards is complete be sure to replace the cover Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals O Be careful not to cut your hand on the edge of the installation bay O Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again O When circuit board installation is complete double check your work O Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board O Install only the specified circuit board s SRX Series Remove only the specified screws Install the Wave Expansion Boards after removing the rear panel cover There are two slots A and B into which a board can be installed Specify which slot s board is to be used by pressing EXPANSION A or B on the front panel when using waves tones or Rhythm Sets from the wave expansion boards 15 gt ne O e o E ma Q Getting Ready Installing SRX Series Boards 1 16 Before installing any Wave Expansion Board turn off the power on
194. ed Settings for Each Function EDIT Keyboard Part and Controllers Settings Local Part Param If the Beat Pattern p 86 is 1 4 there will be no shuffle effect even if the Shuffle Rate value is increased The sixteen Parts played by the RD 700 s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts Keeping the Force of the Notes Of the sixteen Internal Parts you can select three of them to Con stant Velocity function as the three Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 and LOWER which can be freely controlled with the RD 700 s buttons and keyboard These three Parts are collectively known as the Local Parts You can perform operations like Split and Layer with the Local Parts very simply using the RD 700 s keyboard and fetes ruanos the actual strength oO you can make more detailed settings for the Parts as well s the keyboard touch Velocity How to Make Settings regardless of the keyboard touch 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears This sets how strongly sounds are played when you press the keys Continuing Arpeggios Even After EDIT MENU the Keys Are Released Arpeggio Hold Slareesgio 0 p 99 CA Local Fart Param When the hold setting is switched on you can have S 1nternal Part Per J Util it s arpeggios continue to play even after you release the keys 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 7 Local Part o Ameer L yale CU Param
195. ed by the Parameter en boston ue strength of your playing on Gate the the keyboard sound s pitch 48 48 in semitone 4 octaves units This makes settings related to the pitch of each Part CE Coarse 00H 02H This is the maximum value for the change in volume oc curring in response to the ve pis locity Lowering this value FT Sets the Velocity Max 41 y ene sound s pitch 50 50 wi produce softer notes a inunitsofone 50 cents Oe Po Tune Tune Rater board strongly MED 1 cent 1 100 semitone Q A O A O lt O o Q o Turning Each Controller On and Off These settings determine whether the external MIDI device is controlled ON or not OFF by the pedals connected to each PEDAL jack the CONTROL knobs the Modulation lever and the Bender CTR CONTROL Knobs MOD Modulation Lever LLJ lt 2 A Making Detailed Settings for the Piano Tones Piano Edit You can make more detailed settings to fashion just the Tones you want using the piano Tone selected by pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO p 35 This function is called Piano Edit The settings made in Piano Edit are stored to ONE TOUCH PIANO When ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed all settings other than the Piano Edit settings are switched to their status at the time the RD 700 s power was turned on Store any arrangements of settings that you want to k
196. edal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Real Tom 4 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC6 EXC6 GM2 ORCHSTRA Close HiHat2 Pedal HiHat2 Open HiHat2 Ride Cymbal Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Concert BD ConcertBD Mt Side Stick Concert Snr Castanets Concert Snr Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Con Cymbal2 Vibraslap Concert Cym Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 GM2 SFX ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Gt FretN
197. eep in Setup p 56 Making the settings 1 While holding down ONE TOUCH PIANO press SETUP EDIT and NUM LOCK are lit and the following Piano Edit screen appears PIANO EDIT k Tone EER st Concert i Stereo Width MU Sree s Ambience Reverb Level PIANO EDIT En Fredquyencs EG Gi 2 Press CURSOR 4 or D to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 3 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 4 When you finish making settings press ONE TOUCH PIANO Parameters Selecting the Piano Sound This chooses the piano Tone to be selected when ONE TOUCH PIANO is pressed There are sixteen Tones to choose from Changing the Width of the Sound Stereo Width Adjusts the spaciousness of the sound Changes the width of the sound The higher the value set the wider the Parameter Stereo Width 0 63 sound is spread out Changing the Sound s Nuance Nuance This changes the Tone s subtle nuances by altering the phase of the left and right sounds Parameter Value Depending on the piano Tone selected this setting may not be available This effect is difficult to hear when headphones are used Making Detailed Settings for the Piano Tones Piano Edit Changing the Sense of Space Surrounding the Sound Ambience Changing the sound s ambience allows you give your performance
198. egative settings will invert the phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the delay sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Effect Parameter List 23 FBK PCH SHIFT Feedback Pitch Shifter Level Output Level Adjust the output level 22 2V PCH SHIFT 2 Voice Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound This 2 voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the direct sound Coarse A Coarse Pitch A 1 Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine A Fine Pitch A 1 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pan A Output Pan A Adjust the stereo location of
199. eir factory settings While the Factory Reset is in progress no sounds are produced even when the keys are pressed In addition Rhythms and arpeggios being played are also stopped Factory Reset Current 5 Press CURSOR b A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset Current Current SETUP 15 AML FP iano St rraz Load Preset DE 6 Press INC YES The confirmation message appears Factory Reset Current Are You Sure CHOJI CYESS To cancel the Factory Reset press DEC NO 7 Press INC YES once again to start the Factory Reset operation Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Now Executing appears in the display 8 After the Factory Reset operation is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED The Tone screen returns to the display Factory Reset All 5 Press CURSOR P A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset All Erases entire menor content and restores Factors Presets CHO CYESS 6 Press INC YES The confirmation message appears Factory Reset All Are You Sur CHO CYESS To cancel the Factory Reset press DEC NO 7 Press INC YES once again to start the Factory Reset operation Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Now Executing appears in the display 8 After the Factory Reset operation is finished the display will indicate COMP
200. eived ON or not OFF Rx GM System ON Rx GM2 System ON ON OFF Rx GS Reset Using Program Change Messages to Switch Setups Control Channel You can switch the RD 700 s Setups with MIDI messages from an external MIDI device Set the MIDI Receive channel for receiving the MIDI messages Program Changes from the external MIDI device to be used for switching Setups When not switching Setups from an external MIDI device set this to OFF Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Parameter Value Control Channel 1 16 OFF When the Control Channel settings are transmitted along with the part s MIDI receive channel switching of Setups takes priority over the switching of tones For more information about Switching Setups p 97 Setting the Device ID Number Device ID The Device ID number is an identification number used when transmitting and receiving MIDI Exclusive messages When transmitting Exclusive messages the device ID numbers of the corresponding devices must be matched Parameter Value Switching the Pedal s Polarity Pedal Polarity Switch the polarity of pedals connected to the RD 700 This can be set individually for each of the Pedal jacks on the rear panel FC1 FC2 DAMPER On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter
201. el of delay 2 Level 3 Adjust the output level of delay 3 Level 4 Adjust the output level of delay 4 Feedback Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase 117 gt o y 5 9 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List HF Damp Adjust the frequency at which the high frequency range of the delayed sound returned to the input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 46 REVERSE DELAY Reverse Delay is a delay effect that adds the reverse of the input sound as the delay sound Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 Delay Ti
202. elay 1 sound Level 2 Adjust the volume of delay 2 sound Level 3 Adjust the volume of delay 3 sound Level 4 Adjust the volume of delay 4 sound 110 Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 21 TIME CTRL DLY Time Control Delay You can use MIDI messages assigned to the Control knob to make changes in the delay time and pitch in real time Lengthening the delay will lower the pitch and shortening it will raise the pitch Delay Delay time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when each delay sound is heard Accel Acceleration This parameter adjusts the time over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect N
203. en any of the Tone Wheel 1 10 Tones is selected for any of the Local Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER you can perform in Tone Wheel mode in which the creation of organ sounds is simulated An organ features nine harmonic bars that can be drawn in and out and by using the bars in different combinations of positions a variety of different tones can be created Different Feet are assigned to each bar with the pitches of the sounds being determined by these Feet You can simulate the creation of tones using the harmonic bars by assigning Feet to the PART LEVEL sliders While there are only four PART LEVEL sliders you can switch the Feet setting by turning the PART SWITCH buttons on and off thus allowing you to assign eight Feet settings to the sliders What Are Feet Feet basically refers to the lengths of pipe used in pipe organs The length of pipe used to produce the reference pitch the fundamental for the keyboard is eight feet Reducing the pipe to half its length produces a pitch one octave higher conversely doubling the pipe length creates a pitch one octave lower Therefore a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8 eight feet would be 16 for one octave above the reference the pipe would be 4 and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2 l Bring up the Tone screen p 32 If the Tone screen is not currently disp
204. encer Restoring saved settings to the RD 700 When returning settings saved to an external sequencer back to the RD 700 an Exclusive message is transmitted from the external sequencer then the data is received by the RD 700 Be aware that when you restore SETUPs data to the RD 700 the data in the RD 700 will be overwritten and lost l Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external sequencer to the MIDI IN connector of the RD 700 2 Set the device ID number to the same setting as when you performed the bulk dump NEM Setting the Device ID Number gt Setting the Device ID Number Device ID p 71 3 Make sure that EDIT indicator is extinguished If the EDIT indicator is lit press EDIT to turn the indicator light off and put the RD 700 in normal performance mode gt Transmit play back the data from the external sequencer i After the transmitting is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED After playback of the Bulk Dump SETUP data the RD 700 writes the data to the internal memory Be sure never to turn off the power while this data is being written while Now writing Bulk Dump Data Keep on POWER is showing EM For details on transmitting exclusive data refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer Play back the external sequencer at the same tempo you used when performing the bulk dump If you use a faster tempo the data ma
205. enhancer and a flanger in series Level Output Level Enh Sens Enhancer Sensitivity Adjust the output level Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Enh Mix Enhancer Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the 29 DIST gt CHORUS Distortion gt Chorus This effect connects distortion and chorus in series The enhancer are combined with the direct sound parameters are essentially the same as 26 OD gt CHORUS Fig Dly Flanger Pre Delay Time with the exception of the following two E he di J OD Driv Det Drive Gpecify the amountof disiortion Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins unti OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the the flanger sound is heard distortion sound Flg Rate Flanger Rate I Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect 30 DIST gt FLANGER Distortion gt Flanger This effect connects distortion and flanger in series The Flg Depth Flanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect parameters are essentially the same as in 27 OD gt FLANGER distortion sound gt with the exception of the following two Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level D OD Drive Dst Drive Specify the amount of distortion Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back E OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase a A M un 113 n
206. er area being affected Mid2 Gain Middle 2 Gain Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 2 Frequency and Q settings Positive settings will emphasize boost the Middle 2 range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 02 OVERDRIVE This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers Drive Adjust the degree of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Level Output Level Adjust the output level It s a good idea to use the Output Level to adjust the difference in volume between when Overdrive is applied and when it is not applied Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Amp Type Amp Simulator Type Select the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 03 DISTORTION This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive Drive Adjust the degree of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Level Output Level Adjust the output level It s a good i
207. er the multi effects are applied ON or not OFF For example with the MFX Dest setting p 77 set to ALL multi effects are applied to all parts multi effects are not applied to the parts for which this is set to OFF MEX Switch OFF Setting the Required Polyphony Voice Reserve The RD 700 has a maximum polyphony the number of sounds or voices that can be produced simultaneously by the sound generator of 128 voices This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each Part when more than 128 voices are played simultaneously For example if Voice Reserve is set to 6 for Part 1 Part 1 will always have 6 notes of sound producing capacity available to it even if a total of more than 128 notes total for all Parts are being requested You can make separate Voice Reserve settings for each individual Part Parameter 0 64 The figure in parentheses before the settings value shows the remaining Voice Reserve number of voices that can be set It is not possible for the settings of all Parts to total an amount greater than 64 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Setting Reception and Blocking of MIDI Messages from External MIDI Controllers You can change the RD 700 s tones by reception of MIDI messages generated through the actions of modulation levers pedals knobs and other such external MIDI devices controls You can set whether t
208. er to BYPASS Pan A Adjust the pan of the delay A sound Pan B Adjust the pan of the delay B sound Level Bal Level Balance Sets the balance for the levels of the delay A and the delay B Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range 118 Effect Parameter List High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 48 3D DELAY This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Delay C Delay Time Center Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the center delay sound is heard Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the right delay sound is heard gt Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Feedback Adjust the proportion of the delay sou
209. ernal sequencer s Thru function For details refer to the following section About Local Switch Refer to your sequencer owner s manual for instructions on how to carry out this procedure 2 Select the Setup for the performance to be recorded For instructions on selecting the Setup refer to p 54 3 Set the Rec Setting Use the procedure described in the previous section Settings for Recording to make the following settings Rec Mode ON Local Switch OFF 4 Begin recording with the external sequencer 5 Bulk Dump the Setup Using the Utility Bulk Dump Temporary in Edit mode transmit the contents of the selected Setup to the external sequencer For instructions on carrying out this operation refer to Transferring the RD 700 s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump p 92 6 Perform on the RD 700 7 When the performance is finished stop recording with the external sequencer Recording is now complete You can then listen to the recorded performance by playing it back on the external sequencer Exiting Rec Mode When Rec Mode is set to ON you cannot change the MIDI TX settings When you have finished recording the performance use the procedure described in the previous section Settings for Recording to set Rec Mode to OFF The settings made in Rec Setting cannot be saved Rec Setting automatically switch to Rec Mode OFF Local Switch ON when the power is
210. ers the audio quality The audio quality will worsen as this setting is increased PstFilter Post Filter Type OFF A filter will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Frequency Cutoff Frequency setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Frequency Cutoff Frequency setting will be cut Frequency Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Radio Din Radio Detune Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As this value is raised the tuning will drift further Noise Lvl Noise Level Adjust the volume of the radio noise Disc Type Disc Noise Type Selects the type of record noise The frequency at which the noise is heard will depend on the selected type Disc LPF Disc Low Pass Filter Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter that is applied to the record noise Disc Lvl Disc Noise Level Adjust the volume of the record noise Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be
211. es that are created when the RD 700 is used as a sound generator are assigned Since different Tones can be assigned to each of the Parts and controlled individually you can have multiple Tones play simultaneously layer divide the keyboard into separate ranges and have different Tones sound in the different parts Split and enjoy playing ensemble performances The sixteen Parts played by the RD 700 s internal sound generator are referred to as Internal Parts Local Parts and MIDI TX Parts The RD 700 features three Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 and LOWER that you can use for freely controlling the Internal Parts with the RD 700 s buttons and keyboard These three Parts that are used for controlling the Internal Parts are collectively known as the Local Parts Three of the sixteen Internal Parts are assigned to the Local Parts for control the RHYTHM Part is fixed at Part 10 Furthermore you can freely control external MIDI sound generators with the RD 700 in the same manner as with the Local Parts You can likewise control the external MIDI sound generator with the three Parts UPPER1 UPPER2 and LOWER with this group of three Parts being referred to as the MIDI TX Transmit Parts The external MIDI sound generator is assigned to these three Parts for control the RHYTHM Part can also be partially set 31 O lt O lt O lt 9 F gt D F9 Y gt O O Q O 7 a e O se wa O
212. essages transmitted by the RD 700 Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message Oldentity Reply Message Receiving Identity Request Message the RD 700 send this message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 02H 41H 43H 01H F7H 00H 00H 00H 01H 00H 00H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID use the same as the device ID of Roland 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 02H Sub ID 2 Identity Reply 41H ID number Roland 43H 01H Device family code RD 700 00H 00H Device family number code RD 700 00H 01H 00H 00H Software revision level F7H EOX End of Exclusive Data Transmission OData set 1DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 43H 12H aaH bbH F7H ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH Initial value is 10H 00H Model ID 1 RD 700 43H Model ID 2 RD 700 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX E
213. ets 9 O Setups 100 O Effects Multi Effects 65 types Reverb 4 types Chorus 2 types Equalizer Digital 3 Band O Arpeggiator 45 styles O Rhythm Pattern 85 styles O Controllers PART VOLUME slider x 4 EQUALIZER knobs REVERB knob CHORUS knob MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL knob Pitch Bend Modulation lever O Display 128 x 64 dots Full Graphic LCD backlit LCD O Connectors Output Jacks L MONO R Pedal Jacks Damper FC 1 FC 2 MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU Headphones Jack O Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V AC 240 V O Power Consumption 12 W O Dimensions 1 414 W x 374 D x 143 H mm 55 11 16 W x 14 3 4 D x 5 11 16 H inches O Weight 24 1 kg 53 lbs 3 oz O Accessories Owner s Manual Pedal Power Cable O Options Wave Expansion Board SRX Series 1 Keyboard Stand KS 17 Pedal DP Series Expression Pedal EV 5 1 Tones may sound differently and the number of them that can be selected may differ compared with synthesizers in the Roland XV series In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 164 AC Call A A ES 14 A O a kaska tue 86 Adjusting the Display Contrast 28 A DISCO woen D di aN 67 ARPEGGIO lia 12 49 PAE DCS O1O sit 49 83 Arpeo cio Ho in 87 PD OS C10 lO sente a e e 50 ATOS oly le Mist aici ai eee 142 ATPES810 Tempo isa 50 ATK
214. f the a fifth above that of the key pressed pressed G The percussion s attenuation time is length percussion s attenuation time is length OW ened This softens the sense of attack The percussive sound will decay more quickly This gives more of a sense of attack for a sharp sound MEMO The settings changed here are stored to each Tone Even when you exit from Tone Wheel mode you can press ORGAN to select the Tone with the changed settings Changing the Undulation of the Organ Tone Rotary Effect While the Tone Wheel screen is displayed you can change the undulation rate of the Rotary effect with the Pitch Bend lever The Rotary effect is an effect that recreates the sound of the rotating speakers used to augment the sound of an organ The Rotary effect is set to alternately rotate more rapidly or slowly when the Pitch Bend lever is moved to the left and right the direction is not fixed MED This Pitch Bend Lever setting is effective only in the Tone Wheel screen 75 m o o 0 Q 5 Le Lid Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the PART LEVEL Slider Feet Assignments Harmonic Bar You can change the Feet assigned to each of the PART LEVEL sliders used in Tone Wheel mode 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SYSLer l ken Touch s Control El Za HERA Reverb Chorus
215. ffect Parameter List HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 20 QUAD TAP DLY Quadruple Tap Delay The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays The stereo location of each delay sound is as follows Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 Delay Time 2 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 Delay Time 3 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 Delay Time 4 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 4 sound is heard gt Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Level 1 Adjust the volume of d
216. fleR amp B 1 96 045 Gospel 2 50 003 R amp B 1 108 046 Blue Grass 150 004 Funk 1 124 047 Swing 2 111 005 8Beat Pop 1 92 048 Swing 3 130 006 16Beat Pop 1 86 049 Combo 1 140 007 8Beat Rock 1 106 050 Combo 2 160 008 16BeatRock 1 124 051 Fast Swing 2 114 009 Acid Jazz 96 052 Jazz Brush 1 55 010 Hip Hop 98 053 Jazz Brush 2 60 011 Swing 1 160 054 Free Jazz 128 012 Fast Swing 1 110 055 Jazz Waltz 106 013 Blues 1 120 056 5 4 Swing 140 014 Blues 2 152 057 6 8 Swing 120 015 Latin Pop 110 058 7 4 Swing 140 016 Salsa 1 92 059 Bossa Nova 1 120 017 8Bt Fusion 1 112 060 Bossa Nova 2 130 018 16BtFusion 1 100 061 Bossa Nova 3 160 019 Ballad 1 83 062 Fast Bossa 110 020 Ballad 2 84 063 Pop Bossa 120 021 8Beat Pop 2 96 064 Salsa 2 98 022 8Beat Pop 3 108 065 Samba 1 105 023 8Beat Pop 4 75 066 Samba 2 124 024 8Bt Fusion 2 112 067 Mambo 1 94 025 16Beat Pop 2 110 068 Mambo 2 92 026 16Beat Pop 3 75 069 Rhumba 120 027 16BtFusion 2 124 070 Merengue 106 028 16BtFusion 3 124 071 Rockaballad1 120 029 PowerFusion1 128 072 Rockaballad2 89 030 PowerFusion2 120 073 Piano Ballad 60 031 West Coast 124 074 3 4 Brush 90 032 Latin Fusion 125 075 8Beat Rock 2 130 033 R amp B 2 85 076 8Beat Rock 3 136 034 R amp B 3 112 077 16BeatRock 2 140 035 Funk 2 86 078 Progressive 80 036 Funk 3 120 079 5 8 Progress 80 037 ShufflePop 2 184 080 6 8 Progress 80 038 ShuffleR amp B 2 110 081 7 8 Progress 80 039 ShuffleR amp B 3 100 082 Techno 140 040 5 4 Fusion 160 083 Dance 125 041 6 4 Fusion 1
217. h 0 127 Phase Phase 0 180 degree Fit Type Filter type OFF LPF HPF Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Parameter Value Feedback Feedback 98 98 Level C Delay center level 0 127 Level L Delay left level 0 127 Level R Delay right level 0 127 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS HF Damp HF damp MSB Bank Select MSB Control Number 0 LSB Bank Select LSB Control Number 32 PC Program Change PIANO CLAV MALLET STRINGS No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 001 St Concert 1 087 064 001 040 Clav 1 087 066 001 090 RD Strings 1 087 068 001 002 St Concert 2 087 064 002 041 Clav2 087 066 002 091 RD Strings 2 087 068 002 003 Dynamic Pno1 087 064 003 042 Mute Clav 087 066 003 092 Velo String 087 068 003 004 Dynamic Pno2 087 064 004 043 Phase Clav 087 066 004 093 St Strings 087 068 004 005 St Concert 3 087 064 005 044 WahWah Clav 087 066 005 094 Fat Strings 087 068 005 006 BrightPianoi 087 064 006 045 Digital Clav 087 066 006 095 RD Orchestra 087 068 006 007 BrightPiano2 087 064 007 046 Analog Clav 087 066 007 096 ChmbrStrings 087 068 007 008 MellowPiano1 087 064 008 047 Harpsichord 087 066 008 097 ChamberSect 087 068 008 009 MellowPiano2 087 064 009 048 St Harpsichd 087 066 009 098 S
218. h of the chorus effect Phase Tremolo Phase Adjust the spread of the tremolo effect Trem Rate Tremolo Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the tremolo effect Trem Sep Tremolo Separation Adjust the spread of the tremolo effect Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the tremolo chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of DO 100W only the tremolo chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 13 SPACE D Space D is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output
219. hannel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON These messages are transmitted when Foot Contolloer 1 is operated in One Touch Piano Mode OResonance Controller number 71 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 47H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Resonance value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Resonance value is set in MIDI Tx Mode ORelease Time Controller number 72 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Release Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Release Time is set in MIDI Tx Mode OAttack time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 49H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Attack time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Attack Time is set in MIDI Tx Mode OCutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Cutoff value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 These messages are transmitted when Cutoff value is set in MIDI Tx Mode 152 OEffect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127
220. he Overdrive output level OD Sw Overdrive Switch Switches the Overdrive on and off Low Slow Low Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the low frequency rotor If the left and right speakers are too far apart or if there is Low Fast Low Frequency Fast Rate too much reverberation the full 3D effect may not appear Adjust the fast speed FAST of the low frequency rotor Each of these effects has an Out Output Mode parameter If the sound from the OUTPUT jacks is to be heard through speakers set this parameter to SPEAKER If the sound is to be heard through headphones set it to PHONES This will ensure that the optimal 3D effect will be heard If this Low Accel Low Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it takes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times parameter is not set correctly the full 3D effect may not Low Level Low Frequency Level appear Adjust the volume of the low frequency rotor Hi Slow High Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the high frequency rotor Hi Fast High Frequency Fast Rate Adjust the fast speed FAST of the high frequency rotor Hi Accel High Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it takes the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will requ
221. he TONE SELECT button for the selected category flashes Either press the flashing TONE SELECT button or play the keyboard The TONE SELECT button stops flashing and remains lit and the selected tone is set Play the keyboard and you will hear the selected tone The next time you choose this TONE SELECT button the tone you re selected here is played 36 PART SELECT MEMO For more on the RD 700 s internal tones refer to the Tone List p 135 EXPANSION J FUNCTION When changing tones in Layer mode p 42 or Split mode p 43 select the part for which the tone is to be changed with the PART SELECT buttons without pressing the ONE TOUCH PIANO button For details refer to Changing Tones in Layer and Split Mode p 44 If NUM LOCK is turned on the Tone Category cannot be selected with TONE SELECT button For details refer to p 37 Tones selected with RHY GM2 are registered in the following order Rhythm Sets GM2 Rhythm Sets and GM2 Tones Refer to the Tone List p 135 Performing with the Keyboard Specifying the Tone Number to Select a Tone NUM LOCK Each individual tone has a different tone number You can select tones with the TONE SELECT buttons by inputting numerals MEMO with these buttons to specify tone numbers For more on the RD 700 s Turn NUM LOCK on when inputting numerals with the TONE SELECT ee ere cere n buttons Tone
222. his message is received the following controllers will be set to their reset values Controller Reset value Pitch Bend Change 0 center Channel Pressure 0 off Modulation 0 off Breath Type 0 min Expression 127 max Hold 1 0 off Sostenuto 0 off Soft 0 off Hold 2 0 off RPN unset previously set data will not change NRPN unset previously set data will not change AII Notes Off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When All Notes Off is received all notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON the sound will be continued until these are turned off OMNI OFF Controller number 124 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7CH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON Controller number 125 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7DH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON will not be turned on MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 10H 0 16 n MIDI channel number mm mono number The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received The Mono Poly parameter EDIT Tone Edit Mono Poly will change OPOLY C
223. hythm is played the pattern to match a variety of different musical genres Press PART SWITCH RHYTHM to make the button indicator light MEMO For more information The Rhythm begins playing about the kind of Rhythm Patterns please refer to 2 Rhythm Pattern List p Press CURSOR P to go to the Arpeggio Rhythm screen 143 The following Arpeggio Rhythm screen appears g Arpegg y pp MEMO 12130 4 When the Tone screen is displayed the Arpeggio i ai EBBect Pop 1 Rhythm screen appears when CURSOR P is pressed Pressing CURSOR 3 4 when the Arpeggio h n y Rhythm screen is showing Press CURSOR amp or w to move the cursor to RHY e screen Press INC YES or DEC NO to select the pattern The Rhythm s pattern changes If you press RHYTHM once more the indicator light goes out and the Rhythm stops playing n o E Y c Lin s 2 c 0 gt Le U Changing Rhythm Tempos 1 In the Arpeggio Rhythm screen press CURSOR to move the cursor to 4 1 in the screen 2 Press INC YES or DEC NO to change the tempo The Rhythm are played at the selected tempo Youcan change various settings such as tempo and pattern of the Rhythm For details refer to Making the Rhythm Settings Rhythm Pattern p 52 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Applying Effects to the Sound MULTI EFFECTS
224. i 2 3 In addition to chorus p 47 and reverb p 47 the RD 700 also allows you MEMO to apply multi effects to sounds Multi effects provides a collection of 65 For further details on the onboard effects see the Effect Parameter List The factory settings have a suitable effect assigned to each of the tones p 104 different effects such as distortion and rotary from which you can choose EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT ELECO FUNCTION ID HIGH Y o Ce 6 63 0 Ce Ce CeCe Ce Ca Press MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF getting its indicator to Memb ae light adjusted with the CONTROL knob vary with the selected effect For details refer to MFX Control p 77 Effects are not applied to Adjust the amount of multi effect applied with the CONTROL knob To cancel the multi effect press MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF sde the indicator light goes out Edit MFX settings in Edit mode are set to 00 THROUGH p 80 In that case the MULTI EFFECTS When Using Multi effects in Split or Layer Mode ON OFF indicator will blink The RD 700 cannot use more than one multi effect at a time Therefore there is a Source parameter for whatever multi effects settings you select and a Dest parameter for the part to which those settings are to be applied Thus you should note that depending on the Source or Dest settings some Parts may not have multi effects applied while in
225. ied to mono phonic performances Changing the Pitch Coarse Fine Tune This sets the pitch of the tone Po 48 48 Setsthesound spitch pitch Coarse Tune 4 octaves 50 50 50 cents in semitone units Fine Tune Sets the sound s pitch in units of one cent MEMO cent 1 100 semitone With some Tones there may be ranges in which the pitch does not change as intended Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento Switch Time Portamento is a function that causes the pitch to change smoothly from one note to the next note played With the Mono Poly parameter set to Mono portamento is especially effective when simulating playing techniques such as a violin glissandos The Portamento Time setting determines the time for the change in pitch when the portamento effect is applied to the sound Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time ON OFF Portamento Switch Portamento Time 0 127 Changing Tone Elements You can make changes in tones by adjusting the settings of the following four elements Attack Time The time it takes after the key is pressed for a sound to reach full volume Release Time The time it takes after the key is released for a sound to become inaudible Cutoff Adjusts how much the filter is opened Resonance Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the soun
226. ime Reverb HishCut Other FFM MSs Tes CHORUS Settings Screen ELIT CChorus 1 Chorus Delas Chorus Pre 01 Y Chorus Rate Chorus Feedback Other FFM Value DELAY Settings Screen ELIT Del ay 4 Chorus Del aa ES r TT ry Dela9 Center d Del 3 Lert d Del ay Risht d Other FFM Feedback sue 78 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT 4 Press CURSOR 4 or b to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen Making Multi Effects Settings The Multi effects are multi purpose effects that completely change the sound type by changing the sound itself Contained are 65 different effects types select and use the type that suits your aims In addition to effects types composed of simple effects such as Distortion Flanger and other such effects you can also set up a wide variety of other effects even connecting effects in series or in parallel Additionally while some multi effects types feature chorus and reverb the reverb p 78 and chorus p 78 effects discussed later in this volume are handled separately MFX Source MFX Dest On the RD 700 the MFX Type can be stored along with the tones assigned to each part These setting
227. ing the RD 700 to External Equipment ss 22 Connect Pedalsapstn al A da 23 Tourne the Power Orand OH la Ss 24 Tumi On tne POWER Ne 24 Toe OM fe POW CF aresti r odo aso 25 a A nm A ie 25 Restoring the Factory setings Factory Reset vesical 26 Adjusting the Display Contrast LOD Contrast 28 Tuning to Other Instruments Pitches Master Tune 29 Overview Of the RD 700 iscissi dinean aaaeaii eiaa iai aaa 31 basicOreatizaton ol te RD Wise 31 Cons OP Sound ta nus aasan a asahan ts 31 PP a sawaspa yaaa aa qan asua en eee nt ie dote aa aa S 31 arku ma Da ma E mana asnu st aie s au aaa ahus E sss 31 Basic Operator ofthe RD sisikap E 32 Manro ciecen Sneen a N papaqa ena asa masanya naines 32 Special INCA MOMS tdi ironia 32 ADOUL the PUNCH ON DIOS ai 32 About ThE CURSOR D Onun olaa 33 C hanoi the Series Valentina dad 33 Listening to the Demo DEMO PLAY 34 Performing with the Keyboard 35 Piano Rertormances One Touch Pano rad m au nn aS gasas 35 P ronne Ni a Varie of LOMeS asd ua a aa ae din 36 Specifying the Tone Number to Select a Tone NUM LOCK 37 Paying a Ky TI OE uz sm SS SS uyan apup E 38 Selectine Wave Expansion Board ONES SA AS 39 Plaine Two Tones On the Key OO dato 41 To gt witch to melee Mode od 41 Playing with Two Laye
228. inner 80 Funcion BUON uuu y a ias 32 165 G Cudi us m es sa 74 C VENI GUE e usun uapa a 98 GM Sota Module lt a routines Boek 98 EQU SSSR Satu se 14 H Harmonie Dari uuu tal 75 76 FIGAC PHONES diia 14 FIGH A 12 INC YVES laisses dun te 13 33 internal PACE usa yy Reed 31 Internal Part PEM nina tt 89 Mtro EOI ss ad ni 83 K Key Mode ua saa en u ahauasa sa 41 K oi e astilla 63 pO PIO dias 84 EA ee T atakan 88 Key Touch aa 71 72 Key Touch Osetia 72 Key Ins pose ns cdo 64 Key Transpose Local Part 88 Keyboard Controller Section 31 L LAYER a su sans aanaoum au mnaq sp anu ans 12 42 Layer Mode a iciiven se se 41 42 ECD CONAS da 28 Fo P ru yc A AO 31 45 Local Rare Parada ira e sha Uds 87 Local Wik uu 2 us 2 2522 95 96 EOW pO Dr a rasa A aia 12 EE T EEEE EEN ENANA 61 LWR Key Range Lower MIDI TX Part 63 M Master Lune usados 29 Master Volume System seine 70 MAX Velocity Max MIDI TX Part 65 IAN A Re Re 80 NIL AR A ma ua Lu as 77 MEX Destan sQ 77 NIL XS OU ESS DS I O ESN 77 MEX O OWIK kayu uyu A 90 MEXReverb CheoptSuuu u k uy dis 76 A US 59 NIDTESARECor aci 14 59 IMM o a a 13 33 63 ITO att Potent ies 31 62 MIDI TX MIDER NOD ice Sun uu w uuu 12 166 MOD Modulation Lever Switch MIDI TX Part 65 Modulada os 48 Modulation Sw Local Pa
229. instructions below and the Owner s Manual mended by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for e Do not open or perform any internal modifica tions on the unit The only exception would be Y placing the unit provides a level surface that will where this manual provides specific instructions properly support the unit and keep it from which should be followed in order to put in place wobbling user installable options see p 15 PIRE EEE EE EEAS Aaa a Sua pun Nas tu The unit should be connected to a power supply Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts only of the type described in the operating instruc A within it except when this manual provides tions or as marked on the unit specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page e Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can SN damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock e Never use or store the unit in places that are hazards A US ir sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating e This unit either alone or in combination with an duct on top of heat generating equipment or KP
230. ion 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music Suite DP 8 40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street Hochiminh City VIETNAM Tel 08 930 1969 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell
231. iple parameters are presented horizontally in a row as shown in the MIDI TX screen you can get the cursor to move more rapidly by holding down the CURSOR button that points in the direction you want the cursor to move while you also press the CURSOR button that points in the opposite direction ES URSO Changing the Settings Values PART SELECT FUNCTION ZS LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 A B EDIT WRITE MIDI TX NUM LOCK CS OOM OO OOO DEMO PLAy 2O 7 TONE SELECT CLAV BRASS VOICE DEC NO INC YES PIANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR BASS WINDS SYNTH RHY GM2 ICE 200 ooo 900 ooo 900 ooo ooo 200 ooo 900 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 338 338 880 ER 880 888 898 338 898 898 ENTER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 When changing settings values you can use DEC NO and INC YES or the TONE SELECT buttons numeric keys DEC NO INC YES Pressing INC YES increases the value and DEC NO decreases it Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment For faster value increases keep INC YES pressed down and press DEC NO For decreasing value faster keep DEC NO pressed down and press INC YES TONE SELECT Buttons Numeric Keys When NUM LOCK is on lit numerical values can be input directly using the TONE SELECT buttons which then serve as 0 9 numeric keys When you enter the number the value will blink This indicates that the value has not yet been finalized To final
232. ire longer times gt o D 0 a A un 125 n O om ne c O Q Q lt Effect Parameter List Effects Parameter List gt Making Multi Effects Settings p 77 Multi effects Types are indicated in bold characters Parameter refers to the parameter assigned to lt Other Prm gt in MEX Control Value refers to the values that can be set using the CONTROL knobs or in Value 01 STEREO EQ Parameter Value Low Freq Low frequency 200 400 Hz Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Freq High frequency 2000 4000 8000 Hz High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Midi Freq Middle 1 frequency 200 8000Hz 1 Mid1 Q Middle 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Mid1 Gain Middle 1 gain 15 15 dB Mid2 Freq Middle 2 frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Mid2 Q Middle 2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Mid2 Gain Middle 2 gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 02 OVERDRIVE Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Amp Type Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK Pan Output pan L64 0 63R 03 DISTORTION Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Amp Type Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK Pan Output
233. is setting remains stored in memory even while the power is off VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION I Low MID HIGH E E E ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE al un a ies ON OFF RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 1 y E I 7 y 7 2 _ es DA a MIDI TX NUM LOCK LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 A B EDIT WRITE SPLIT LAYER A DEMO PLAY TONE SELECT PIANO SET UP ss w SYNTH RHY be no inc les PIANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR A INDS G U 900 900 900 900 900 900 cho 200 200 200 388 388 388 388 388 388 BE 880 880 880 L PIANO EDIT ENT IR 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH REVERB J CHORUS MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL BRASS VOICE ON OFF D I 4 e 4 x 4 r A A Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt o 1 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MEHU A Ss Len 1 Kea Touch Z Control EG Ja MPAA REL erbrEhorus Tone Edit Press CURSOR aa to select 0 System Press CURSOR P to display the Edit screen EDIT stem 14h Master Tune EGRESHz Master Lolume 127 EG Control SETUP LED Contrast Tone Remain Clock Sources Or IHT A ne O O e o E k Q Getting Ready VOLUME grrr Dri111111101M 30 REVERB QE MULTI EFFECTS CONTROL Low 4 O A x
234. ive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 64 SYM RESONANCE Sympathetic Resonance When you depress the damper pedal on an acoustic piano the sound from the strings that were struck resonates with other strings adding rich reverberations and broadness to the sound This effect simulates the resonance called Sympathetic Resonance Depth Adjust the depth of Sympathetic Resonance Damper This is controlled by a normal damper pedal with the resonance setting corresponding to the amount the pedal is pressed Pre LPF This sets the reference frequency for the low end input cutoff filter Pre HPF This sets the reference frequency for the high end input cutoff filter When not cutting bass frequencies set this to BYPASS 124 Effect Parameter List Pkg Freq Hi Level High Frequency Level This sets the reference frequency for the filter used in adjusting Adjust the volume of the high frequency rotor the specific range of DU Separate Separation When not cutting bass frequencies set this to BYPASS I Adjust the spatial dispersion of the sound Pkg Q The range of frequencies is based on the frequency set in Pkg Speed Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor
235. ize the value press ENTER With some parameters NUM LOCK may come on automatically allowing you to input numerical values directly with the TONE SELECT buttons MEMO The negative or positive sign of numerical values are switched with DEC NO or INC YES O lt 1 lt O lt 9 gt O A X NI Q Listening to the Demo DEMO PLAY Here s how to listen to these songs The RD 700 features the internal demo songs that exhibit the special capabilities of the instrument No Song Name Composer Copyright 01 RD Party Scott Wilkie 2001 Roland Corporation All rights reserved 02 Retro Active Igor Len 2001 Roland Corporation Unauthorized use of this 03 Escape Scott Tibbs 2001 Roland Corporation material for purposes other 04 High End Speak Scott Tibbs 2001 Roland Corporation than private personal 05 Nome digas Scott Tibbs 2001 Roland Corporation enjoyment is a violation of 06 Pastorale Igor Len 2001 Roland Corporation applicable laws VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION HIGH ES le E v v m a N G lt ONTR gt 0 gt Low MID iz BED CED ws EFFECTS PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH Hold down NUM LOCK and press WRITE The Demo screen appears No data for the music that is played will be output EDITO Deno from the MIDI OUT EE connector CHAIN PLAY 0 a1 RD Party AS ReLro
236. just the vol bal bet th dri d that i FAMA CU Siting ae ss Fe This effect connects distortion and delay in series The sent through the flanger and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger will be parameters are essentially the same as in 28 OD DELAY with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dst Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the output q i distortion sound Level Output Level Adjust the output level 32 ENHAN gt CHORUS Enhancer Chorus This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series 28 OD gt DELAY Overdrive Delay E Enh Sens Enhancer Sensitivity This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will Enh Mix Enhancer Mix Level h paced digo lore Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the le ES ne enhancer are combined with the direct sound OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left Cho Delay Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until 0 is center and 63R is far right the chorus sound is heard Dly Time De
237. king reverb type effect Stop the reverb sound only when input loud sound so that prevent the play sound become unclear Attack Attack Time Sets the time it takes the gate fully opens after being triggered Hold Hold Time Sets the time it takes the gate starts closing after the instant the direct sound goes under the threshold level Release Release Time Sets the time it takes the gate fully closes after passes by the hold time Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 58 SLICER By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds Beat 1 1 4 4 For a single measure containing four quarter notes this sets the level of each sixteenth note when the measure is divided into sixteenth notes When set to 0 no sound is output Rate Determines the cycle for one measure gt Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Attack Sets the speed at which the volume changes between beats The higher the value the faster the volume changes Reset Selects the in
238. l Output Level Adjust the output level Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Amp Sw Amp Simulator Switch Turns the Amp Simulator on off Amp Type Amp Simulator Type Adjust the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Tone Adjust the sound quality of the Overdrive effect Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 55 STEREO COMPRESSOR Sustain Adjust the time over which low level sounds are boosted until they reach the specified volume Attack Attack Time Adjust the attack time of an input sound Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 56 STEREO LIMITER Threshold Threshold Level Adjust the volume at which compression will begin Release Release Time Adjust the time from when the volume falls below th
239. l function assigned to the CONTROL knob e Check the Control EQ Control set tings in Edit mode p 74 Are the UPPER Part and the LOWER Part set to the same value in the Local Part Param Part Assign settings in Edit mode p 89 Is MIDI TX set to ON e When MIDI TX is set to ON the external sound generator is con trolled To change the RD 700 s Tones and make settings in Key board mode set MIDI TX to OFF p 59 Is the PART SELECT button for the Part containing the Tone you want to change set to ON p 44 Is NUM LOCK on e Tone categories cannot be selected with the TONE SELECT buttons when NUM LOCK is on Could you have the Tone Wheel screen appearing in the display p 75 e In the Tone Wheel screen pressing a TONE SELECT button selects one of the Tone Wheels from 1 through 10 Set the Part 10 Receive Channel set ting in Internal Part Prm in Edit mode to 10 p 90 Troubleshooting Rhythm Not Sounding Rhythm Intro Not Played Rhythm Not Starting From Beginning Effects Not Ap plied Effects Sound Wrong Check Solution Has the System Clock Source setting in Edit mode been set to MIDI p 70 Do you have an external MIDI device connected e You cannot set the tempo with the RD 700 when Clock Source is set to MIDI Accordingly if no external MIDI device is connected then no tempo setting is made for the Rhythm and so the Rhythm does not sound Is the MIDI
240. lay Time Cho Rate Chorus Rate Adjust the time delay f hen the direct d begi til A err S Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect the delay sound is heard Cho Depth Chorus Depth Delay Fbk Delay F k L l elay Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is Dly HFDmp sent through the chorus and the enhancer sound that is not sent Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the chorus will be the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Bal Delay Balance output Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is Level Output Level sent through the delay and the overdrive sound that is not sent Adjust the output level through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W 33 ENHAN gt FLANGER Enhancer gt Chorus only the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay will be 0 0 output This effect connects an
241. layed press EDIT or MIDI TX so that the indicator is turned off 2 In the Tone screen select an ORGAN Tone Wheel 1 10 Tone for one of the Parts 3 Press the CURSOR 4 button The following Tone Wheel screen appears This Tone Wheel screen appears only when a Tone Wheel Tone is selected for one of the Parts in the Tone screen 5128 4k UPL Piti Tone dheeel gt Pare 51 ou 4 Press a TONE SELECT button to select one of the Tone Wheels from 1 through 10 While the Tone Wheel screen is displayed the TONE SELECT buttons provide for selection among Tone Wheels 1 10 5 When the PART LEVEL sliders are moved the harmonic bars move in the display and the tone changes By pressing the PART SWITCH buttons on and off you can adjust the sounds for other Feet If the cursor is moved to the value at the bottom of the screen you can adjust the sounds for Feet with DEC NO and INC YES 6 Press CURSOR W to move the cursor to lt Perc gt and press DEC NO or INC YES to change the value Perc Percussion adds an attack type sound to the beginning of the note to give the sound more crispness The attack sound changes according to the value The Percussion is applied only to the UPPER1 Tone Settings Desn No percussion is added Percussion sounds at a pitch one octave 2nd above that of the key pressed Percussion sounds at a pitch an octave and a fifth above that o
242. making connections confirm the following Is the volume level of the RD 700 or connected amp turned all the way down Is the power to the RD 700 or connected amp turned off 22 Getting Ready 2 Connect supplied AC power cable to the RD 700 and plug the Use Stereo headphones other end into an AC power outlet 3 Use only the specified Connect the RD 700 and the external device expression pedal EV 5 Use audio cables to connect audio equipment such as an amp or speakers sde espere E Use MIDI cables to connect MIDI devices connecting any other expression pedal you risk If you are using headphones plug them into the PHONES jack rene mention ardl Connect pedal switches or expression pedals as necessary or damage to the unit Connecting Pedals Connect the pedal included with the RD 700 to one of the Pedal jacks When connected to the Damper jack the pedal can be used as a damper pedal Connecting the pedal to the FC 1 or FC 2 jack allows you to assign a variety of functions to the pedal p 73 About the Output Jacks Q 0 5 7 0 Q o lt The RD 700 s output jacks are capable of use with either balanced or unbalanced output To use balanced output use a cable with a balanced TRS type phone plug To use unbalance output use a cable with an unbalanced TS type phone plug TRS SLEEVE Ground SLEEVE Ground TIP Hot TIP Hot RING Cold 23 A O O O e o
243. me 2 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 Delay Time 3 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 Delay Time 4 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 4 sound is heard 23 Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Feedback 1 4 Adjust the proportion of the delay 1 and 4 sound that is fed back into the effect Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase HF Damp 1 4 Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound Delay 1 4 fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Threshold Threshold Level Specify the volume level at which the reverse delay will begin to apply Pan 1 2 3 Output Pan 1 2 3 Adjust the pan of delay sound Delay 1 3 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 1 2 3 Adjust the output level of delay 1 2 and 3 Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Bala
244. me Bank Sele Program Change Number ct ss sp When switching setups you must match the MIDI channel of the transmitting device with the RD 700 s Control channel p 70 When switching the tones in each part match the MIDI channel of the transmitting device with the RD 700 s Receive channel However when the Control channel and the Receive channel are both set to the same channel the Control channel takes priority and setups are switched Switching Tones The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the RD 700 to select Tones as shown in the following table PIANO 001 019 E PIANO 020 039 0 0 0 0 0 Bank Select Program Change Number 001 019 001 020 001 020 001 030 001 020 87 87 87 ORGAN 060 089 87 STRINGS 090 109 87 _ 87 GTR BASS 130 159 087 001 030 BRASS WINDS 160 179 087 001 020 VOICE SYNTH 180 199 087 001 020 iil 200 203 086 CS 001 004 MEMO For details on the SRX Series refer to the owner s manual for 064 065 067 068 070 071 072 064 the SRX Series Wave Expansion Board 97 O O 3 3 A 3 Q g U SIIIAS n gt A z O E s VU 0 lt 9 U Connecting External MIDI Devices Using the RD 700 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode The RD 700 features a GM mode a convenient way to play back o
245. melodies and cannot be transposed but is capable of beautiful sonorities Just Minor The scales of the major and minor just intonations are different You can get the same effect with the minor scale as with the major scale This scale devised by the philosopher Pythagoras eliminates dissonance in fourths and fifths Disso nance is produced by third interval chords but melodies are euphonious This scale is a modification of the meantone and just intonations that permits greater freedom in trans position to other keys Per formances are possible in all keys MI This scale makes some compromises in just into nation enabling transposi tion to other keys This is a combination of the mean tone and Pythagore an scales Performances are possible in all keys first technique III Arabic Scale This scale is suitable for Arabic music Sets the keynote 2POW HP3 O Q LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Other Functions Utility Utility includes functions for sending data to external MIDI sequencers and other devices and for restoring the settings to their original factory state MEMO For more on Rec Setting in Utility menu refer to Settings for Recording Rec Setting p 95 Transferring the RD 700 s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump You can transfer the contents of Setups and the RD 700 s system settings to an exte
246. meter Value Setting the Key Range for Each Part Key Range When SPLIT is pressed in normal performance conditions the key range is divided at the Split Point and you can play with two different tones on one keyboard Using Key Range allows you to make even more detailed key range settings This sets the lower and upper limit of the key range in each part After moving the cursor to the parameter to be set you can make the setting by pressing the designated key and ENTER Parameter Value This is effective only when SPLIT is on p 43 in the key range settings You cannot set the key range s lower limit higher than the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit below the lower limit Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Sens Max This setting determines how the volume changes in response to the force used to play the keyboard velocity and the maximum value of the change This setting is disregarded with certain tones This setting determines how the volume changes in re sponse to the velocity The volume is increased as the keyboard is played with greater force when a positive Vistas 63 Value is used when a nega 63 tive value is selected the vol ume decreases as the keys are played with greater force If this is set to 0 the volume will not be affected by the strength of your playing on the keyboard This i
247. meters to create the tones you like and changing the settings for various functions is known as editing When EDIT is pressed and the indicator is lit the RD 700 switches to Edit mode You can save edited settings to Setups Edited settings are discarded when the RD 700 s power is turned off so be sure that any settings you want to keep are saved to a Setup For details refer to Storing Settings to Setups WRITE p 56 System function 0 System settings are saved the instant a change is made in any of the parameter values Therefore no changes to the settings are lost even when the power is turned off Parameters That Can Be Set You can set the following parameters in Edit mode 0 System P 69 Master Tune P 29 Master Volume EQ Control LCD Contrast P 28 Tone Remain Clock Source Rx GM System ON Rx GM2 System ON Rx GS Reset Control Channel Device ID Pedal Polarity 1 Key Touch P 71 Key Touch Key Touch Offset Velocity Velocity Delay Sensitivity Velocity Keyfollow Sensitivity 2 Control EQ P 73 FC1 FC2 Control Source EQ Low Frequency EQ Mid Frequency EQ Mid Q EQ High Frequency lt Band gt Gain Harmonic Bar P 76 3 MFX Reverb Chorus P 76 MFX Source MFX Destination Type MFX Control lt Other Parameter gt Value Reverb Type Reverb Pre Delay Reverb Time Reverb High Cut lt Other Parameter gt Value Chorus Delay Chorus Pre Delay
248. n of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the modulation delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the modulation delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 19 TRI TAP DLY Triple Tap Delay The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right Delay C Delay Time Center Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard gt Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Level C Center Level Adjust the volume of the center delay sound Level L Left Level Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Level R Right Level Adjust the volume of the right delay sound 109 gt o y 5 a A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt E
249. n the keys for that part are played PART SWITCH will turn on or off each time you press it PART LEVEL Slider When the MIDI TX indicator is on PART LEVEL adjusts the volume level of each of the MIDI TX parts 62 MIDI TX ON MEM For more on controlling the Local parts refer to Adjust the Volume Level for Individual Parts PART SWITCH LEVEL p 45 Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard Detailed Settings for Transmitted Parts MIDI TX After pressing MIDI TX you can then set the following parameters affecting MIDI TX parts Cio re I TDT ATK REL COF RES WP CAttack Time lu Phy CPortament AAA MATO Ta DMP FCI Fes 5128 rs MOD END SHS WI ON 22 UFZ OM ON 22 lu ON ON 22 Pa CModulation Switch How to Make Settings l Press MIDI TX getting the indicator to light The RD 700 is set to control the external MIDI devices 2 Press CURSOR 4 LIA LI D Lor ZW to move the cursor to the parameter to be set You can get the cursor to move more rapidly by holding down the CURSOR button that points in the direction you want the cursor to move while you also press the CURSOR button that points in the opposite direction 3 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value Press INC YES and DEC NO simultaneously to switch the Value to OFF Adjusting the Volume and Pan Sets the panning localizes sound image for each of the
250. n ur a hua Eaa 82 Selecting Rhythm Variations Rhythm Type iia pi Sense 82 Change me the Drum Set Riy Sel 83 Changing the Pattern Without Changing the Drum Set Rhy Set Change 83 Switching the Intro and Ending On or Off Intro Ending ss 83 10 Making Arpeggio Settings Arpeggio J T 83 Howto Make vetne sl iio 83 Adjusting th Tempo CMP u u Sans S S susu eae iste en ee 84 Selecting Parts to Play Arpeggios Dest Lar 84 Setting the Key Range for the Arpeggio Performances Key Range 84 petting the Way Arpeesios are Played Style 84 Changing the octave range in arpeggio style Octave Range ss 85 Changing the Order in Which Notes Are Played Motif ss 85 Changing the Groove Feel Beat Pattern Accent Rate Shuffle Rate 86 Keeping the Force of the Notes Constant Velocity ss 87 Continuing Arpeggios Even After the Keys Are Released Arpeggio Hold 87 Keyboard Part and Controllers Settings Local Part Paran 87 Howto Make Setides a ha B AR de 87 Selecting the Partto BS Seb Ocal Part triana ta tane 88 Setting the Key Range for Each Part Key Range ss 88 Setting the Change in Volume According to the Force Used to Play the Keyboard Velocity Sens Ma ices eka ttn treacle A ne ne 88 Setting
251. nce Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of DO 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 47 SHUFFLE DELAY Shuffle Delay adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Delay Delay Time Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard gt Delay parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Shuffle Shuffle Rate Sets the ratio as a percentage of the time that elapses before the sound plays in Delay B relative to the time that elapses before the sound plays in Delay A When set to 50 the delay times are the same Accel Acceleration Adjust the time over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Feedback Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this paramet
252. nd Of Exclusive The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 153 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms 3 Parameter Address Map Transmission of marked address is divided to some packets For example ABH in hexadecimal notation will be divided to OAH and OBH and is sent received in this order 1 RD 700 Model ID 00H 43H Olndivisual Parameters These messages are transmitted when Bulk Dump Temporary funcion is executed Please don t use a parameter or a address marked lt Reserved gt The parameters for Setup are temporary If you want to leave the parameters after the RD 700 is turned off execute SETUP Write Start Address Description 00 00 00 00 System 10 00 00 00 Setup Temporary OSystem Offset Address Description 00 00 00 System Common 00 10 00 System Onetouch Piano Tone Backup OSetup Offset Address Description 00 00 Setup Common 02 00 Setup Common MFX 04 00 Setup Common Chorus 06 00 Setup Common Reverb 10 00 Setup Local Part Upperl 11 00 Setup Local Par
253. nd off Performs the same function as MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Switches the multi effects p 53 on and off POW HPI Transmitting the same MIDI messages as the Src settings p 74 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Changing the CONTROL Knob Settings Control Src Normally the CONTROL knob is used for making settings that adjust the multi effects MFX Control but they can also be used for settings that change the way tones are played or the tempo E The CONTROL knob adjusts the amount of MEX CONTROL multi effect applied Control The CONTROL knob TONE CONTROL changes the way tones are played TEMPO The CONTROL knob CONTROL changes the tempo This setting deter mines the MIDI mes sages that will be used CC1 CC31 for transmitting the CC33 CC95 settings of the CON 96 PITCH BEND TROL knob MIDI 97 messages are not AFTER TOUCH transmitted when TEMPO CONTROL is selected for the Con trol When TONE CONTROL is assigned to Control you cannot change the parameters affected by the CONTROL knob The parameters that are changed are predetermined for each individual Tone Additionally effects may not be applied to some Tones for example GM Tones MED When Control is set to TONE CONTROL turning the CONTROL knob changes the way the tone is played regardless of whether MULTIEFFECT ON OFF is switched on or off Changi
254. nd that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Level C Level Center Adjust the volume of the center delay sound Level L Level Left Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Level R Level Right Adjust the volume of the right delay sound HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear the output sound The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 49 3V PCH SHIFT 3 Voice Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound This 3 voice pitch shif
255. ne pas vous couper les doitgs sur le bord de l ouverture d installation O Ne jamais forcer lors de l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s Si la carte s ajuste mal au premier essai enlevez la carte et recommencez l installation Quand l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s est termin e rev rifiez si tout est bien install O Toujours teindre et d brancher l appareil avant de commencer l installation de la carte N installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes sp cifi es SRX Series Enlevez seulement les vis indiqu es Installer les cartes d extension apr s avoir enlev la plaque arri re 19 Getting Ready French language for Canadian Safety Standard Installer les cartes de s rie SRX 1 Avant d installer une carte d extension Wave teindre tous les appareils reli s au RD 700 2 D tacher la plaque arriere en enlevant les vis indiqu es sur le sch ma suivant EXPANSION BOARD P A ne O O e o E k Q 3 Ins rer le connecteur de la carte dans un des cr neaux pour la s rie SRX SRX A SRX B tout en enfon ant les supports carte dans les trous de celle ci Carte d extension Wave serie SRX Si la m me sorte de carte d extension Wave est install e dans les cr neaux SRX A et SRX B il ne sera possible de s lectionner que les donn es de la carte d extension Wave install e dans le cr neau SRX A Avant l installa
256. ng the Equalizer Frequency Settings Freq Q This changes the EQUALIZER knob frequency settings Selects the frequency for the low frequency EO Low equalizer This general Fe 200 400 Hz ly changes the level of the frequency range ex tending below this point 200 250 315 400 500 630 1000 EQ Mid 1250 1600 2000 Freq 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 di the center Adjusts the Q band width of mid frequen cy equalization The 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 EQ Mid Q 80 higher the value the narrower the range of frequencies that are af fected Selects the frequency for the low frequency EQ High 2000 4000 8000 equalizer This general Frog Hz ly changes the level of the frequency range ex tending above this point Selects the frequency range for the Gain set LOW MID ting Corresponds to lt Band gt HIGH the LOW MID and HIGH EQUALIZER knobs Set Frequency Point for the mid frequency equalizer Changes the level of the selected fre quency range with fre quency selected here at The gain of the range determined by lt Band gt 12 0 12 0 dB 0 2 dB steps can be changed You can also change this value by turning the EQUALIZER knob With the System s EQ Control set to SYSTEM p 70 you cannot change the above parameters appears in the screen 74 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Simulating the Creation of Organ Tones Tone Wheel Mode Wh
257. ng type plug A polarized plug has two blades with unused for long periods of time one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any third prong are provided for your safety When the provided way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid plug does nat fit into your outlet consult an electrician for has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus replacement of the obsolete outlet the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About AY WARNING and
258. nges Try playing the keyboard If you press ARPEGGIO once more the indicator light goes out and the keyboard returns to the normal performance mode Changing Arpeggio Tempos 1 2 50 In the Arpeggio Rhythm screen press CURSOR to move the cursor to 4 in the screen Press INC YES or DEC NO to change the tempo When you play the keyboard arpeggios are played at the selected tempo By changing the arpeggiator settings you can create arpeggios with various patterns For details refer to Making Arpeggio Settings Arpeggio p 83 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Playing Rhythm RHYTHM The RD 700 features internal drum patterns complementing Jazz Rock and MEMO other various musical genres These drum patterns are referred to as When an Local part and Rhythms MIDI TX part are played You can turn Rhythms on and off individually in any key mode You can simultaneously the perform using Rhythms combined with various functions for example performances of both parts are synchronized performing arpeggios while a Rhythm is playing M VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION ID HIGH avin ZN a D REVERB CAE MULTI EFFECTS TONE SELECT CONTROL ve y A O 4 ee PIANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRINGS PAD GTR BASS WINDS SYNTH RHY GM2 209 000 900 990 990 990 900 000 900 990 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
259. nly the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 35 CHORUS gt DELAY Chorus Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay unit in series Cho Delay Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output DelayTime Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Delay Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HFDmp Delay HFDamp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Bal Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the chorus sound that is sent through the delay and the chorus sound that is not sent through the delay With a
260. note Delay R Delay time right 0 1800 ms note Delay 4 Delay time 4 0 1800 ms note Feedback Feedback 98 98 Pan 1 Output pan 1 L64 63R Level C Level center 0 127 Pan 2 Output pan 2 L64 63R Level L Level left 0 127 Pan 3 Output pan 3 L64 63R Level R Level right 0 127 Pan 4 Output pan 4 L64 63R HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Level 1 Level 1 0 127 BYPASS 1 Level 2 Level 2 0 127 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES Level 3 Level 3 0 127 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB Level 4 Level 4 0 127 High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Feedback Feedback 98 98 Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Level Output level 0 127 BYPASS 1 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Low Gain Low gain 15 15 dB 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS High Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO 100W Level Output level 0 127 49 3V PCH SHIFT 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Parameter Value ADR SORE RECO ROR nee s Coarse 1 2 3 Coarse pitch 1 2 3 24 12 Fine 1 2 3 Fine pitch 1 2 3 100 100 cent 46 REVERSE DELAY PreDelay1 2 3 Pre Delay time 1 2 3 0 0 500 ms Feesback1 2 3 Feedback level1 2 3 98 98 Parameter Value Pan 1 2 3 Output pan 1 2 3 L64 63R Delay 1 Delay time 1 0 900 ms note Level 1 2 3 Level 1 2 3 0 127 Delay 2 Delay time 2 0 900 ms note Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 239 405 Delay 3 Delay time 3 0 900 ms note Balance Effect bal
261. nse reverb with short decay ROOM2 sparse reverb with short decay STAGE reverb with greater late reverberation STAGE2 reverb with strong early reflections HALL1 reverb with clear reverberance HALL2 reverb with rich reverberance Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard gt o E 0 a A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List Time Reverb Time Adjust the time length of reverberation HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which the reverberant sound will be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high frequencies will be cut resulting in a softer and more muted reverberance If you do not want the high frequencies to be cut set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 25 GATED REVERB Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its nat
262. o have the following MIDI messages received ON or not OFF individually in each part Parameter Value Rx Bank Select Rx Program Change Rx Modulation Rx Bender ON OFF Rx Volume Rx Hold 1 Rx Pan Setting the Tuning Method Temperament Key This sets the tuning and keynote tonic for each part Most modern songs are composed and played with the assumption that equal temperament will be used but when classical music was composed there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence Playing a composition with its original tuning lets you enjoy the sonorities of the chords that the composer originally intended When playing with tuning other than equal temperament you need to specify the keynote for tuning the song to be performed that is the note that corresponds to C for a major key or to A for a minor key If you choose an equal temperament there s no need to select a keynote Equal Temperament This tuning divides an octave into 12 equal parts Every Tempera EQUAL interval produces aout ment the same amount of slight dissonance This setting is in effect when you turn on the power Tempera ment Tempera ment Key JUST MAJ JUST MIN PYTHAGOR EAN KIRNBERG ER MEAN TONE WERCK MEISTER ARABIC C C D D E F F G G A A B Just Major This scale eliminates dissonance in fifths and thirds It is un suited to playing
263. o set the tune C B of the Part 1 Arabian Scale send the following data FO 41 10 42 12 40 11 40 3A 6D 3E 34 0D 38 6B 3C 6F 40 36 OF 76 F7 BASCII Code Table Setup Name of MIDI data are described the ASCII code in the table below D H Char D H Char D H Char 32 20H SP 64 40H 96 60H 33 21H 65 41H A 97 61H a 34 22H 66 42H B 98 62H b 35 23H 67 43H C 99 63H E 36 24H 68 44H D L00 64H d 37 25H 69 45H E 101 65H e 38 26H amp 70 46H F 102 66H 39 27H 71 47H G 103 67H g 40 28H 72 48H H L04 68H h 41 29H 73 49H I 05 69H i 42 2AH 74 4AH J 06 6AH j 43 2BH 75 4BH K L07 6 BH k 44 2CH 76 4CH L 08 6CH J 45 2DH 77 4DH M L09 6DH m 46 2 EH 78 4EH N 0 6EH n 47 2FH 79 4FH O 1 6FH 0 48 30H 0 80 50H P 2 70H p 49 31H 1 81 51H Q 3 71H q 50 32H 2 82 52H R 4 72H e 51 33H 3 83 53H S 5 73H s 52 34H 4 84 54H T 6 74H E 53 35H 5 85 55H U i 75H u 54 36H 6 86 56H V 8 76H V 55 37H 7 87 57H W 9 77H w 56 38H 8 88 58H x 120 78H x 57 39H 9 89 59H Y 121 79H y 58 3AH I 90 5AH Z 22 7AH Z 59 3 BH 91 5BH 23 7BH 60 3CH lt 92 5CH 24 7CH 61 3DH 93 5DH 25 7DH 62 3EH gt 94 5EH o 63 3FH 95 5FH gt D decimal H hexadecimal SP is space gt D D 5 a A un 161 MIDI Implementation ofueu9 O1 U04 puag uolid Ay00J8A 9UBLUOSDY O O IH UONC
264. of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 18 MOD DELAY Modulation Delay This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a flanger Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Feedback Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Mode Feedback Mode Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Rate Adjust the speed of the modulation Depth Adjust the depth of the modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gai
265. oiz EXC7 EXC7 Gt CutNoise Gt CutNoise String Slap FI KeyClick Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Footsteps Applause Creaking Scratch Wind Chimes Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starship Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog HorseGallop Bird Rain Thunder Wind Seashore Stream 141 n O O c Q o o lt gt D D 0 3 o A un Arpeggio Style List Style 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 32 PORTAMENTO A PORTAMENTO B GLISSANDO SEQUENCE A SEQUENCE B SEQUENCE C SEQUENCE D ECHO SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS RHYTHM GTR 1 RHYTHM GTR 2 RHYTHM GTR 3 RHYTHM GTR 4 RHYTHM GTR 5 3 FINGER GTR STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD WALTZ SWING WALTZ REGGAE PERCUSSION HARP SHAMISEN BOUND BALL RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA MAMBO LATIN PERCUSSION SAMBA TANGO HOUSE LIMITLESS Motif all all all all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 all all GLISSANDO all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM
266. olarity ee Functions to EDIT FC1 2 Control EQ FC1 FC2 Changing the Equalizer EDIT EQUALIZER Knob Control EQ EQ Low Mid p 74 Frequency Settings High Freq EDIT EQUALIZER ON OFF Switching the Chorus and EDIT CHORUS Knob MFX Reverb Chorus Delay Chorus Delay Selecting the Reverb MFX Reverb Chorus Type Reverb Type Changing the CON MEX Reverb Chorus MFX TROL knob parameter aus Linok Control F EDIT REVERB Knob Changing the Multi ef MFX Reverb Chorus MEX sas Type EDIT MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF Type Changing the Rhythm Patterns EDIT RHYTHM Rhythm Pattern Pattern Changing the Arpeggio Style EDIT ARPEGGIO Arpeggio Style Setting the Transposition EDIT TRANSPOSE Local Part Param for Local Part Key Transpose n a Key Range for EDIT SPLIT Local Part Param Key Range EN Turning the Controllers EDIT BENDER Local Part Bender Sw are used to control the l Local Parts On and Off EDIT Modulation Local Part Modulation Sw 145 p P P P P P P P 78 78 PAL 77 82 84 88 88 89 MIDI Implementation Model RD 700 Digital Piano OData Entry Controller number 6 38 Date Mar 1 2001 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte Version 1 00 BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H NH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 1 Receive d ata mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB Il LSB mChannel Voice Messages OVol
267. ones feature wide dynamic range and rich expressive power It is also furnished with a wealth of electronic piano organ string synth pad and other Tones that allow you to use the instrument as a stage piano Once you try it onstage you ll come to fully understand its capabilities Also included is a Piano Edit function that allows you to make subtle changes to the piano Tones allowing you to create Tones for all kinds of performance situations p 66 A Full 128 Voices The RD 700 features 128 voice polyphony with all sounds available in every performance mode Enjoy natural performances even when layering multiple sounds Simple Push Button Operation You can access Split and Layer modes and carry out other main operations simply by pressing a single button p 41 Furthermore pressing the ONE TOUCH PIANO button lets you immediately switch to the settings most suited for piano performances regardless of the mode or settings currently in effect p 35 Full Graphic LCD Screen The panel includes a high visibility fully graphic liquid crystal display This allows you to carry out operations smoothly while viewing Tone names and other information in the easy to read LCD screen High Quality Effects In addition to favorite Roland synthesizer and XV Series multi effects the RD 700 also features a sympathetic resonance effect that reproduces the resonance of an acoustic piano You can also get realistic tone changes
268. ontroller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received The Mono Poly parameter EDIT Tone Edit Mono Poly will change 148 System Realtime Message Timing Clock Status F8H This message will be received if the Clock Source parameter EDIT SYSTEM Clock Source is MIDI Active Sensing Status FEH When Active Sensing is received the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages While monitoring if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received and message interval monitoring will be halted System Exclusive Message Status Data byte Status FOH iiH ddH eeH F7H FOH System Exclusive Message status ii ID number an ID number manufacturer ID to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is Roland s manufacturer ID is 41H ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard Universal Non realtime Messages 7EH and Universal Realtime Messages 7FH dd ee data OOH 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Of the System Exclusive messages received by this device the Universal Non realtime messages and the Universal Realtime messages and the Data Request RQ1 messages and the Data Set DT1 messages will b
269. op of nor place heavy objects on S Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be N placed so they are out of the reach of children the unit e Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet T hands when plugging into or unplugging from N an outlet or this unit e Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external devices e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet p 25 Z in your area pull the plug on the power cord out e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning e of the outlet e Install only the specified circuit boards SRX Series Remove only the specified screws p 15 O e Should you remove the screws fastening the board slot cover make sure to put them in a safe place O out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 3 and 4 please read and observe the following Power Supply e Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air conditioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical applianc
270. or Ring Modulator is an effect which applies amplitude modulation AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device Frequency Sets the frequency at which modulation will be applied Modulate Modulator Selects the input of the direct sound for the envelope controlling the modulation When set to SOURCE the frequency is modulated according to the envelope of the sound input to the multi effects When set to DIRECT the frequency is modulated according to the sound as it is without passing through the effects Mod_Mon Modulator Monitor Determines whether the input sound used as the modulator is output ON or not OFF Sens Sensitivity Sets the amount of frequency modulation applied Polarity Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies UP or lower frequencies DOWN Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of DO 100W the effect sound will be output
271. ound No Sound From the Connected MIDI Device Is PART SWITCH set to OFF p 45 p 62 Is a Part s volume turned off with the PART LEVEL slider p 45 p 62 If the sound for a pressed key does is not being played is the Local Switch set to OFF e In the Utility Rec Setting in Edit mode set the Local Switch to ON p 95 Are the effect settings correct e Check the ON OFF settings for MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF p 53 and MFX Reverb Chorus MEX lt Other Prm gt effect balance and level settings in Edit mode p 77 p 104 No Sound in a Specific Range Check Solution Are the Wave Expansion Boards cor rectly installed e When selecting settings while us ing the EXPANSION A or B Tones or Rhythm Sets confirm that the specified Wave Expansion Boards are properly installed in the specified slots p 16 Has the volume been lowered by pedal operations or by MIDI messag es volume messages or expression messages received from an external MIDI device Is the Part s volume level turned down e Check the PART LEVEL sliders p 45 p 62 and the Internal Part Prm Volume settings in Edit mode p 90 Are the Part s MIDI Receive channel and the MIDI Transmit channel for the connected MIDI device matched e Check the MIDI Receive channel settings with Internal Part Prm Re ceive Channel in Edit mode p 90 Is the device enabled to transmit MIDI messages e Set MIDI TX and
272. p 80 Reverb Type When you change the Reverb Type the Reverb parameters will be automatically adjusted to the optimal values Rather than setting the reverb parameters one by one you can make the settings more easily by first setting the Reverb Type and then changing only the necessary parameters REVERB Normal Reverb Simulates the reverbera tion of room interiors It SRV ROOM produces a well defined and spacious reverbera tion Simulates the reverbera tion exhibited by hall It SRV HALL provides a deeper rever beration than the Room reverbs Simulates a plate reverb unit a type of artificial re SRV PLATE verb that utilized a metal plate NEM Some Reverb Type settings have parameters that cannot be set Parameters that cannot be changed are indicated by yy Reverb Pre Delay Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard The delay time increases as the value is raised Values 0 0 100 0 Reverb Time Adjust the time length of reverberation The reverberation becomes longer as the value is increased Values 0 127 Reverb High Cut Frequency This sets the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb will be reduced If you do not wish to cut the high range of the returned sound select BYPASS Values 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12500
273. pan L64 0 63R 04 PHASER Parameter Value Manual Manual 100 8000 Hz Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 Resonance Resonance 0 127 Mix Mix level 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Level Output level 0 127 126 05 SPECTRUM Parameter Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 6 Band 7 Band 8 Q Pan Level Band 1 gain Band 2 gain Band 3 gain Band 4 gain Band 5 gain Band 6 gain Band 7 gain Band 8 gain Q Output pan Output level 06 ENHANCER Parameter Sens Mix Low Gain High Gain Level Sensitivity Mix level Low gain High gain Output level 07 AUTO WAH Parameter Filter Sens Manual Peak Rate Depth Level Filter type Sensitivity Manual Peak Rate Depth Output level 08 ROTARY Parameter Low Slow Low Fast Low Accel Low Level Hi Slow Hi Fast Hi Accel Hi Level Separate Speed Level Low frequency slow rate Low frequency fast rate Low frequency acceleration Low frequency level High frequency slow rate High frequency fast rate High frequency acceleration High frequency level Separation Speed Output level 09 COMPRESSOR Parameter Attack Sustain Post Gain Low Gain High Gain Pan Level Attack time Sustain Post gain Low gain High gain Output pan Output level Value 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 15 15 dB 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 L64 0 63R 0 127 Value 0 127 0 127 15
274. power supply cord to share S e This RD 700 for use only with Roland stand KS i 17 Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating Always grasp only the plug on the power supply watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive cord when plugging into or unplugging from an loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat outlet or this unit up and eventually melt through Ce RS A A A e Atregular intervals you should unplug the power e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all with your retailer the nearest Roland Service dust and other accumulations away from its Center or an authorized Roland distributor as prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the listed on the Information page power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire e Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board p 25 e Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on this unit Also avoid the use of insecticides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray cans etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth e Never climb on t
275. put of the sound that acts as the trigger resetting the one measure pattern When set to OFF the pattern is not reset even if the input is present When set to SOURCE the pattern is reset by the sound input to the multi effects When set to DIRECT the Pattern is reset by the direct sound that bypasses the multi effects Threshold Reset Threshold Sets the volume level at which the reset begins Monitor Reset Monitor Switch Determines whether the sound used as the reset trigger is output ON or not OFF This parameter is disabled when Reset parameter is set to OFF or SRC Mode Sets the manner in which the volume changes as one beat progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one beat s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following beat is the same as the one preceding it then there is no change in volume SLASH The level is momentarily set to 0 before progressing to the level for the next beat This change in volume occurs even if the level of a following beat is the same as the one preceding it Shuffle Sets the timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered Beats Beat 1 2 Beat 1 4 Beat 2 2 The higher the value selected the later the timing with which the beat progresses Level Output Level Adjust the output level 59 ISOLATOR An equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges
276. r Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo EXC7 EXC7 EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 GM2 ELECTRIC High Q Slap ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Elec Kick 1 Side Stick Elec Snare 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 Synth Drum 2 Close HiHat2 EXC1 Synth Drum 2 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Synth Drum 2 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Synth Drum 2 Synth Drum 2 Crash Cym 1 Synth Drum 2 Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 MuteTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 GM2 ANALOG High Q Slap ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick TR 808 Kick 808 Rimshot 808 Snare 1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 808 Tom 2 TR 808 CHH EXC 1 808 Tom 2 808__chh EXC 1 808 Tom 2 TR 808 OHH EXC 1 808 Tom 2 808 Tom 2 808 Crash 808 Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym 808cowbe Crash Cym 2 Vi
277. r Internal Part ds EDIT Internal Part Prm Temperament p 168 p p p p 25 70 45 90 71 88 88 29 46 80 80 81 88 91 Effects Reverb Chorus Multi Effects Changing the amount of reverb for the entire RD 700 A A rary REVERB knob p Changing the amount of reverb for each Tone ion EDIT Tone Edit Reverb Amount p Changing the amount of reverb for Piano Tone E A A acs PIANO EDIT Reverb Level p Changing the reverb type ee EDIT MFX Reverb Chorus Reverb Type p Changing the amount of chorus for the entire RD 700 olaaa CHORUS knob p Changing the amount of chorus for each Tone PER TT EDIT Tone Edit Chorus Amount p Changing the chorus type acts EDIT MFX Reverb Chorus Chorus Delay p Changing the Multi Effects type ee EDIT MFX Reverb Chorus Type p Changing the Multi Effects type for each Tone E E T EDIT Tone Edit MFX p Selecting the Part that the Multi Effects applied to ds EDIT MFX Reverb Chorus MFX Source p Setting the Multi Effects ON OFF for Individual Parts a EDIT Internal Part Prm MFX Switch p Control Disabling the Pedal or Bender for Individual Parts ode EDIT Local Part Param Switch p Changing the function of the CONTROL knob ar nine EDIT Control EQ Control p Changing the function of the pedals PEA EE eee eee ee EDIT Control EQ FC1 FC2 p Key Range Set
278. r create GM score data music files for GM sound module Switching to GM mode not only enables proper playback of GM Scores but also allows you to mute specific Parts play the Parts using the RD 700 s keyboard and change the Tones for specific Parts Points to Note Regarding GM Mode e All buttons and knobs other than CURSOR buttons INC YES DEC NO ONE TOUCH PIANO and SETUP are disabled in GM mode Be sure to play back from the beginning of the song When playback of a song is started at any point other than the beginning the sound generator settings are not reset to the GM and GM2 initial settings values and the song is not played back correctly e When the RD 700 receives a GS Reset message the RD 700 is enabled for the GS format a shared set of specifications proposed by Roland for standardization of multi timbral sound modules This permits playback of music data bearing the GS logo GS music data However Roland s Sound Canvas Series including the SC 8850 and SC 8820 models feature a different sound module format and expanded tone map so data created exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back properly on the RD 700 e You cannot enter GM mode using solely the RD 700 on its own The RD 700 is switched to GM mode upon reception of a GM System On GM2 System On or GS Reset message which has been supplied to it by being contained within the setup data placed at the beginning of a song
279. raltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k l 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 P
280. rating the keyboard into left and right hand sides with a different Tone played in each O Layer Two sounds are played simultaneously In Layer mode the two overlapping parts are called UPPER1 and UPPER2 in Split mode the part in the right hand side of the keyboard is referred to as the UPPER part and the part in left hand side of the keyboard is referred to as the LOWER part In Single mode UPPER1 is played over the entire keyboard One tone can be assigned to each part Layer Mode UPPER 1 UPPER 2 Split Mode Split Point LOWER g 0 ja O a 3 Q To Switch to Single Mode You can use the following two methods to switch from modes such as Split or Layer mode in which two or more Tones are played together to the mode whereby one Tone is played over the entire keyboard Single mode e Press ONE TOUCH PIANO Switch to the mode most suitable for piano performances where the piano Tone is used by the entire keyboard However pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO renders all settings made up to that point ineffective Save any settings you want to keep to a Setup p 56 before pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO e To Turn Off LAYER or SPLIT Extinguishing the Indicator This switches the RD 700 to the mode in which the UPPER1 Tone is played by all keys 41 Performing with the Keyboard Playing with Two Layered Tones LAYER VOLUME EQUALIZER a O al m KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT ELECTO FUN
281. rb Chorus Amount setting for the part selected for MFX Source applies to all parts However when the MEX Source is set to FIXED the Reverb Chorus Amount setting for UPPER 1 applies to all parts When MFX Dest is set to SAME MFX The Reverb Chorus Amount setting for the part selected for MFX Source applies to parts assigned the same MFX Type as the part selected for MFX Source Changing the Effect Applied to the Tone MFX This sets the multi effect applied to the tone The MEX selected here may not be applied with certain MFX Source and MFX Dest settings For details refer to MFX Source MFX Dest p 77 MEX Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 104 Playing Sound Monophonically Mono Poly Specifies whether the tone will play polyphonically POLY or monophonically MONO The MONO setting is effective when playing a solo instrument tone such as sax or flute Additionally when this is set to MONO LEGATO you can have monophonic performances played legato Legato is a playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed creating a flowing feel with no borders between the notes This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist MONO oy the last played note will sound Two or more notes can be Mono Poly POLY played simultaneously MONO LEGATO Legato is appl
282. re 2 Low Bongo Mute Wah Gir Noise 2 RD Jazz Kit Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Tmbl Flam Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute Wah Gtr Noise 2 RD House Kit Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco TmblFlam Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute LoFi Snare 1 Jungle Snare Techni Hit Philly Hit TR 808 Kick TR 808 Kick 2 Jungle Kick Techno Kick Rock Snare Dry Electric Snare Jungle Snare 2 Slappy Wah Gir Noise 1 Wah Gtr Noise 2 139 n O O c Q o o lt gt D D 3 a A O un 140 GM2 STANDARD High Q Slap ScratchPush EXC7 ScratchPull EXC7 Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Standard KK1 Side Stick Standard SN1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 EXC1 Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 EXC1 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 EXC1 Real Tom 4 Real Tom 1 Crash Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle EXC2 LongWhistle EXC2 Short Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 MuteTriangl EXC5 OpenTriangl EXC5 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 GM2 ROOM
283. red Tones LAYER as 42 Playing Different Tones in Two Different Sections of the Keyboard SPLIT 43 Changing Tones in Layer and Split Modena tddi 44 Adjust the Volume Level for Individual Parts PART SWITCH LEVEL 45 Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE ss 46 Adding Reverberation to the Sound REVERB knob ss 47 Adding Breadth to the Sound CHORUS kh 6b 22 una nd 47 Changing the Sound s Pitch in Real Time Bender Modulation Lever 48 Adjusting the Level of the Sound s Low Mid and High Frequency Ranges EQUALIZER 48 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances 49 Creating Arpeggios from the Chords You Play ARPEGGIO ss 49 Change th OCS 210 SIY E raen nr ads 50 Changing Arpegeto Tenposin a irs ha aaa A ane 50 Jayne hh hw REO aos 51 Chane me mme RINM Tae u Sn R S Ni 52 Chane me Roy Chitin Len DOS ne aan une tee 52 Applying Effects tothe sound MULTI EFFECTS sen a aa dr aie 53 Selectine stored Settines lo EU isa pai de de q bh ashes aasan 54 Stoning settines to Setups WRITE urna 56 Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard 59 Whats MID eri toros 59 ADOUE NIIDI C Oi CO Sala 59 Connecting to External MIDI Sound Generators ss 59 MIDI Send Channel Seve es u u o 60 Selecting Sounds
284. region above the Cutoff setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff setting will be cut Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Step Rate Adjust the frequency of pitch change gt Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note StpRateSw Step Rate Switch This setting determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF Key Sync Keysync Switch Determines whether the Flanger LFO is reset according to the input sound ON or not OFF Threshold Keysync Threshold Adjust the volume level for which reset will be applied KSync Phs Keysync Phase Sets the LFO phase when the LFO is reset Low Gain Adjust the low frequency range gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W the flanger sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 43 FORMANT FILTR Formant Filter This adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice
285. requency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left O is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 10 LIMITER The Limiter compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring Threshold Threshold Level Adjust the volume at which compression will begin Ratio Compression Ratio Adjust the compression ratio Release Release Time Adjust the time from when the volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 11 HEXA CHORUS Hexa chorus uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the cho
286. rince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2449624 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of May 1 2004 Roland For EU Countries This produc
287. rm on the RD 700 s keyboard even when Parts are muted Exiting GM Mode l Inthe GM Mode screen press PIANO or SETUP The RD 700 goes out of GM mode and the Tone screen appears in the display When the above step is carried out while playback of a GM Score is in progress the RD 700 switches out of GM mode and the Tone screen is displayed while playback of the song continues 98 Troubleshooting If the RD 700 does not function in the way you expect first check the following points If this does not resolve the ee problem consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station If certain messages appear in the display during operation please refer to Error Messages Other Messages p 103 Is the RD 700 s AC adapter properly plugged into a power source as well as connected to the RD 700 No Sound Power Not Com ing On Is the power for connected amps and speakers turned on Is the volume turned all the way down Is the VOLUME slider turned all the way down Are all connections properly made e When using the RD 700 as a stand alone instrument be sure to con No Sound for Specific Part nect with audio cables or use head phones p 22 Are sounds audible with head phones connected e If sounds are audible through headphones it may indicate that there is a short in an audio cable or some sort of amp or mixer prob lem Check the cables and equip ment once again No S
288. rnal MIDI device This operation is called bulk dump Use this procedure to save the data to an external MIDI device in situations such as when you want to perform by connecting another RD 700 with the same settings or to prevent your Setups and system settings from corruption 1 Use a MIDI cable optional to connect the RD 700 s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector on an external sequencer 2 Press EDIT to turn it on The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MEHU k Rh athn Pattern Es APPe 3310 Palocal Part Param Ss Internal Part Prem 3 Press CURSOR W to select 9 Utility 4 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen EDIT Utilitual Rec Setl ira Bulk Dune Tenmrorar Bulk Dume SETUP Factory Reset Current Factory Reset All 5 Press CURSOR amp or W to select Bulk Dump Temporary or Bulk Dump SETUP Value Parameter The contents of Setups in the Bulk Dump SETUP ga I specified range are transmitted Bulk Dump The contents of the currently se Temporary lected Setup are transmitted While the Bulk Dump is in progress no sounds are produced even when the keys are pressed In addition Rhythms and arpeggios being played are also stopped Bulk Dump Temporary 6 Press CURSOR P A screen like the one shown below appears Bulk LF TenPorar a TenPoraria SETUP 15 PiranoRsSLrnas Send OY CHO CYESS 7 Put the extern
289. roller number 72 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Release Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Release Time parameter EDIT Tone Edit Release Time will change OAttack time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 49H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Attack time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The Attack Time parameter EDIT Tone Edit Attack Time will change OCutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Cutoff value relative change OOH 7FH 64 0 63 The Cutoff parameter EDIT Tone Edit Cutoff will change ODecay Time Controller number 75 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Decay Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The decay time will change in GM mode OVibrato Rate Controller number 76 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4CH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Rate value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The vibrato rate will change in GM mode OVibrato Depth Controller number 77 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4DH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Depth Value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The vibrato depth will change in GM
290. rough and grainy This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Unsuitable places for connection Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion Telephone line ground or lightning rod may be dangerous in the event of lightning 2 POWER Switch Switch turns the power on off p 24 3 AC Inlet Connect the included power cable to this inlet p 22 4 Wave Expansion Board Installation Slot Remove the cover for installation of optional wave expansion boards SRX Series p 15 5 MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU Used for connecting external MIDI devices and for transmission of MIDI messages p 22 p 59 p 95 6 PEDAL Jacks DAMPER FC1 FC2 Connecting the pedal switch DP 6 provided with the RD 700 to the DAMPER jack allows you to use the switch as a damper pedal With an optional expression pedal such as the EV 5 or other model connected to the FC 1 or FC 2 jack you can then assign a variety of functions to the pedal p 23 p 73 7 OUTPUT R L MONO Connectors
291. rt 89 Mono Poly Tone musas 80 MIOC soca O 85 NSP a aa 61 NIDDPTLPELLI C TD u RS usan unu ha l ne co 53 MULTLEFFECTS ON OFF uuu sns 12 53 Musicos 98 N Nuance vts 66 WOM COCE rra ns 13 33 37 O Octave Range Arpesolol uuu ya sss 85 One Touch Fiano seri 35 Orca TONG o 75 OUTPUT C 6 IectOryz ustus a a 14 Output Tack las 23 P P T Portamento Time MIDI TX Part ssssseseeeesseeeese 65 Pan Internal Part 90 PANMIDOTA Part ad 63 A A die IEP Tee cas 31 Part Assien Ocal Par rea es nee 89 PARTEEVEL Slider manner 45 62 PART SELECT DU osa 2 La T mua 13 PART SWITCH LEVEL z a ala kuskas 12 45 62 Pattern RAY HAE Patti 82 PP ose an cca ns tds 61 PTA EA ACK estate denis 14 Pedal Polarity System iii 71 lt Perc gt Percussion Tone Wheel Mode 75 PIO IN SWAG uyu u w Sus dio 14 Pi as nue 35 AO A ne nn tt din nu 12 39 Ping Edi ia 66 Pitch BEI u suqu k aaa ia 48 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever 13 POR Portamento Switch MIDI TX Part eseseseneseeesee 65 Portamento Switch Tone 81 Portamento Time Tone 81 POWER SWVC Bis ti Aid 24 Progra Chanel ii 97 Program Nulnbetr sais nu 61 R REC Mode svarede 95 Rec SETIS PA o o dates 95 Receive Channel y uuu Adena acti 90 Recording To an External MIDI Sequencer
292. rus sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation 106 Effect Parameter List Delay Dev Pre Delay Deviation Pre Delay determines the time from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Pre Delay Deviation adjusts the differences in Pre Delay between each chorus sound Depth Dev Depth Deviation Adjust the difference in modulation depth between each chorus sound The shift between the start of each of the chorus sounds increases as the value is increased Pan Dev Pan Deviation Adjust the difference in stereo location between each chorus sound With a setting of 0 all chorus sounds will be in the center With a setting of 20 each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 12 TREMOLO CHO Tremolo Chorus Tremolo Chorus is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation dept
293. s a sound resembling that obtained in a wide open space The cn pe becomes deeper Ambience as the value is increased Depending on the piano Tone selected this setting may not be available Changing the Amount of Reverb Effect Reverb Level Adjusts the depth of the Reverb effect This functions the same way as the REVERB knob but the setting made here can be called up simply by pressing ONE TOUCH PIANO The reverb effect be Reverb Level 0 127 comes stronger as the val ue is increased Making the Midrange Equalizer Settings EQ SW EQ Gain EQ Frequency EQ Q This sets the midrange equalization ans determines whether the following EQ SW ON OFF EQ Freq EQ Gain and EQ Q settings are en abled ON or not OFF Change th tof EQGain 15 0 15 0 dB a E AROUREE equalization gain 200 250 315 400 Set Frequency Point 500 630 800 Changes the level of EQ 1000 1250 1600 the selected frequency Frequency 2000 2500 3150 range with frequency 4000 5000 6300 selected here at the cen 8000 Hz ter Adjusts the Q band width of equalization 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 The higher the value the narrower the range of frequencies that are affected Depending on the piano Tone selected this setting may not be available 67 Y Q gt o m o O Q LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT The process of changing tone para
294. s determine which multi effects are used as well as the part to which the multi effects are applied The multi effect doesn t change even when you switch to a different tone This setting is convenient when you want to use the MEX Source same multi effect even when changing tones UPPERI UPPER2 LOWER RHYTHM The MEX Type of the Tone assigned to the selected part is applied The multi effect is applied SOURCE PART only to the part selected in MEX Source The multi effectis applied to MEX Dest parts assigned the same multi effect as the part se lected in MFX Source z li ALL PART The multi effects are applied to all parts When MEX Source is set to FIXED the MFX Dest setting is fixed at ALL PART and the multi effects are applied to all parts Type Select the Multi Effects Type There are 65 different multi effects available Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 104 When MEX Source is set to UPPER1 UPPER2 LOWER or RHYTHM the Tone Edit MFX Type settings p 80 also change MFX Control You can make changes to the multi effect parameters in real time with the CONTROL knob Here select the parameter to be changed The parameters that can be changed vary with the different multi effects selected in Type The available choices depend on the Type setting Refer to the Effect Parameter List p 104 lt Other Prm gt Value You can make more detailed the multi effe
295. s for the volume and the 1 127 way sounds are played remain constant Changing the Timing of Sounds in Response to the Velocity Velocity Delay Sens This sets the interval from the time the key is played to when the sound is produced As the value is increased the timing of the sound is delayed more when more force is used to play the keys Parameter Value Velo Delay Sens Changing the Touch Sensitivity According to the Key Range Velocity Keyfollow Sens This setting changes the touch sensitivity according to the key range being used As the value is increased the touch becomes heavier in the upper registers and lighter in the lower keys Velo Keyfolw Sens 63 63 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Pedal CONTROL Knob and Equalizer Settings Control EQ You can change the functions assigned to the pedals and CONTROL knob and change the equalizer settings How to Make Settings l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU A SS ten l ken Touch Za Control Et Za HF Reverb Chorus Tone Edit ka 2 Press CURSOR amp W to select 2 Control EQ 3 Press CURSOR b to display the Edit screen EDIT COontrold FC 1 HAHN le ee FOS COCe Ts SDF T Control MFR Control ares CCib GENERAL 1 EDIT CEG 4 EG Low Frey RH EG Mid Frey SHIRA EG Mid Ll EG High Fres ARRAS Bard gt
296. s the maximum value for the change in volume oc curring in response to the ve Velocity Max 1 127 locity Lowering this value will produce softer notes even if you play the key board strongly Setting the Transposition for Each Individual Part Key Transpose You can perform with each part transposed to a different pitch When the Keyboard Mode is Layer you can create a richer sound by setting the two Tones to different octaves Also if the Keyboard Mode is set to Split and you are playing a bass Tone in the lower Part you can use the Key Shift function to play the bass at a lower pitch Parameter Value MEMO You can also set the same degree of transposition for all parts Key Transpose with Transpose For details refer to Transposing the Key of the Keyboard TRANSPOSE p 46 Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Turning the Controllers in Each Part On and Off These settings determine whether the pedals connected to each PEDAL jack Damper FC1 FC2 the Modulation lever the Bender and the CONTROL knob are used to control the Parts ON or not OFF Parameter Value Damper Pedal Sw FC1 Pedal Sw FC2 Pedal Sw ON OFF Modulation Sw Bender Sw Control Sw Assigning Internal Parts to Local Parts Part Assign This determines which internal parts are assigned to the Local parts Parameter Value Setting MIDI Receive Parts Internal Part Prm The
297. sed a single character blank space is inserted pressing EXPANSION B deletes one character Repeat steps 5 6 to input the name Pressing CURSOR w even while inputting the name moves the cursor to the save destination Setup number When you have finished determining the save destination and the name for the new Setup press CURSOR to move the cursor to the confirmation message The INC YES indicator is flashing k w SETUP BASS SLage Piano Cal Chase Dest No LY Chanae Hame CrEs1 Hrite CHo Exit If you do not want to save the Setup press DEC NO The operation is cancelled and you are returned to the Tone screen A O lt O B O TI A 0 un Press INC YES The confirmation message appears Hew SETUP i AAS StaSe Piano Never switch off the power Are YOU sure while Please keep on CHO YES power appears in the display Doing so may damage the When INC YES is pressed saving of the Setup begins Peale s ere ne When you have finished saving the Setup COMPLETED appears in the impossible to use this display and the WRITE indicator goes out instrument You are returned to the Tone screen 57 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Settings Not Saved in a Setup The following settings cannot be saved to a Setup Rec Setting p 95 CONTROL knob positions values System settings p 69 S
298. selected the indication of the Parto Parti UPPER1 3 corresponding Value changes and the value is set Tone BAI St Concert Bend Range Refer to DELAY p 134 Stretch Tune OFF m o o 0 4 Press CURSOR d Jor to switch screens and press CURSOR or W to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 5 Press INC YES or DEC NO to set the value 6 When you have finished making the settings press EDIT extinguishing its indicator You are returned to the Tone screen 79 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Selecting the Part to Be Set lt Part gt Tone Choose the Part for which you want to make settings Parameter Value 1 16 Parts assigned to the Local lt Part gt parts are indicated by a marker UPPER1 appear ing after the part name When the part to be set is selected the name of the as signed tone appears You can select tone using the TONE SELECT buttons Setting the Reverb Chorus Depth Reverb Chorus Amount This sets the depth of the reverb and chorus effects When this value is set to 0 no reverb or chorus effect is applied when the REVERB or CHORUS knob is turned Parameter Value How to apply the Reverb Chorus Amount The manner in which the effect is applied will differ depending on the settings for MFX Source and MFX Dest p 77 When MFX Dest is set to ALL PART The Reve
299. setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 36 FLANGER gt DELAY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Flg Delay Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate Flanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Depth Flanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flg Bal Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output DelayTime Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Delay Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HFDmp Delay HFDamp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPAS
300. settings in MFX Reverb Chorus is set to a note value the delay sound may not be heard Either adjust the tempo or change the numerical value of the de lay timing p 79 Check the MFX Source and MFX Dest settings for multi effect that is not sounding in the Lower Part to which itis applied p 77 e With certain settings the Lower Part s MFX settings are disregard ed Is the Tone Wheel screen appearing in the display e The pitch bend effect cannot be ap plied with the pitch bend lever while the Tone Wheel screen is in the display In this case the pitch bend lever functions as a slow fast switch for the Rotary effect p 75 In some Tones the settings are such that sounds randomly play from the left or right side are panned each time the keys are pressed These set tings cannot be changed Sounds can be distorted due to equalizer multi effect and Part vol ume settings Adjust the following settings e PART LEVEL sliders p 45 e Edit mode MFX Reverb Chorus MEX lt Other Prm gt effect levels p 77 e System Master Volume settings p 70 Is a distortion type effect being ap plied to the sound p 77 p 80 The screen is displayed by selecting a Organ Tone Tone Wheel 1 10 for any of the UPPER1 UPPER2 or LOWER Parts in the Tone screen and then pressing CURSOR d p 75 Key Range Set tings Not Effec tive Is SPLIT set to OFF e Key Range goes into effect when SPLIT
301. st the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 61 3D FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until the flanger sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger sound Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger sound Feedback Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Higher settings will produce a more distinctive sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the flanger sound Filter Filter Type OFF No filter is used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq set
302. stanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Cana RD House Kit Dance Kick MC 500 Beep 1 MC 500 Beep 2 Concert Snare Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell House Kick 1 House Kick 2 House Snare Rim House Snare 1 House Claps House Snare 2 House Low Tom 1 House Closed Hi Hat House Low Tom 2 House Pedal Hi Hat House Mid Tom 1 House Open Hi Hat House Mid Tom 2 House High Tom 1 House Crash Cymbal House High Tom 2 House Ride Cymbal Reverse Cymbal House Ride Bell Shake Tambourine House Splash Cymbal House Cowbell House Crash Cymbal Vibra slap Pop Ride Cymbal 2 House High Bongo House Low Bongo House High Conga House Mute Conga House Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa House Maracas Short High Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro House Guiro House Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block High Hoo Low Hoo Electric Mute Triangle Electric Open Triangle Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana EXC1 EXC1 EXC1 EXC2 EXC 2 EXC3 EXC3 EXC4 EXC4 EXC5 EXC5 EXC6 EXC6 C7 C8 Note No RD Pop Kit Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Tmbl Flam Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute Wah Gir Noise 2 RD Rock Kit Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Tmbl Flam Shekere 1 Sheke
303. t Upper2 12 00 Setup Local Part Lower 13 00 Setup MIDI Tx Part Upperl 14 00 Setup MIDI Tx Part Upper2 15 00 Setup MIDI Tx Part Lower 16 00 Setup MIDI Tx Part Rhythm 20 00 Setup Internal Part Part 01 21 00 Setup Internal Part Part 02 2F 00 Setup Internal Part Part 16 40 00 Setup Internal Part 1 Tone Backup 41 00 Setup Internal Part 2 Tone Backup 4F 00 Setup Internal Part 16 Tone Backup 60 00 Setup Tone Wheel 1 Backup 61 00 Setup Tone Wheel 2 Backup 69 00 Setup Tone Wheel 10 Backup OSystem Common Offset Address Description 00 00 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 100 0 100 0 cent 00 04 aaa aaaa Master Level 0 127 00 05 000a aaaa Setup Control Channel 0 16 1 16 OFF 00 06 0000 000a Clock Source 0 1 NT MID 00 07 0000 000a Damper Polarity 0 1 STANDARD REVERSE 00 08 0000 000a FC1 Polarity 0 1 STANDARD REVERSE 00 09 0000 000a FC2 Polarity 0 1 STANDARD REVERSE 00 OA 0000 000a EQ Control 0 1 SETUP SYSTEM 00 OB 0000 000a Tone Remain 0 1 OFF O 00 OC 0000 000a Receive GM1 System On 0 1 OFF O 00 0D 0000 000a Receive GM2 System On 0 1 OFF O 00 0E 0000 000a Receive GS Reset 0 1 OFF O 00 OF 0000 aaaa One Touch Piano
304. t Quartet 087 068 009 010 Band Piano 1 087 064 010 049 Vibes 087 066 010 099 Prelude 087 068 010 011 Band Piano 2 087 064 011 050 Warm Vibes 087 066 011 100 Marcato Str1 087 068 011 012 Honky Tonk 087 064 012 051 AmbienceVibe 087 066 012 101 Marcato Str2 087 068 012 013 Rock Piano 1 087 064 013 052 Celesta 087 066 013 102 Film Strings 087 068 013 014 Rock Piano 2 087 064 014 053 Marimba 087 066 014 103 Film Octaves 087 068 014 015 Soft Piano 087 064 015 054 Dyna Marimba 087 066 015 104 Pizzicato 087 068 015 016 Forte Grandi 087 064 016 055 Islands Mit 087 066 016 105 JP 8 Str1 087 068 016 017 Forte Grand2 087 064 017 056 Morning Lite 087 066 017 106 JP 8 Str 2 087 068 017 018 Piano 1 087 064 018 057 Digi Bell 087 066 018 107 JP 8 Str 3 087 068 018 019 Piano 2 087 064 019 058 Air Bell 087 066 019 108 JP 8 Str 4 087 068 019 059 Chime Bells 087 066 020 109 JP 8 Str 5 087 068 020 E PIANO No Tone Name MSB LSB PC ORGAN PAD 020 Rhodes 1 087 065 001 No Tone Name MSB LSB PC No Tone Name MSB LSB PC 021 Rhodes 2 087 065 002 060 Mellow Bars 087 067 001 110 ClassicJPpad 087 069 001 022 Stage Rhodes 087 065 003 061 Click Organ 087 067 002 111 Soft Pad 1 087 069 002 023 Suitcase 087 065 004 062 Full Stops 087 067 003 112 Soft Pad 2 087 069 003 024 NY Rhodes 087 065 005 063 Ballad B 087 067 004 113 Lunar Strngs 087 069 004 025 Tremolo Rhd 087 065 006 064 Gospel Spin 087 067 005 114 Morph Pad 087 069 005 026 Phaser Dyno 087 065 007 065 Full Jazz 087 067
305. t complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference receiv
306. t easy to play even for children This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play MEDIUM with the most natural touch This is the closest to the touch of an acoustic piano Key Touch This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to fin ger the keyboard more force fully than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so the keyboard touch feels heavier Dynamic fingering adds even more feeling to what you play SUPER An even heavier setting than HEAVY HEAVY This setting is switched automatically according to the value of Key Touch Offset which follows Making Fine Adjustments to the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Offset This setting provides even more precise adjustment of the key touch than available with the Key Touch setting alone This allows you to get ten levels of adjustment between Key Touch settings values Key Touch The touch sensitivity becomes 10 9 j Offset heavier as the value increases When this settings value continues into the positive or negative direction the Key Touch s five step value is switched automatically in accordance with that value Setting a Constant Volume Level in Response to the Playing Force Velocity This sets the sound to play at a fixed volume regardless of the strength used to play the keyboard the velocity Parameter Description Volume levels and the way REAL sounds are played change in re sponse to the velocity Velocity Value
307. t the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the Do not use this apparatus near water manufacturer Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Never use with a cart stand tripod bracket Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in or table except as specified by the accordance with the manufacturers instructions manufacturer or sold with the apparatus y Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators When a cart is used use caution when heat registers stoves or other apparatus including moving the cart apparatus combination to amplifiers that produce heat avoid injury from tip over Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when groundi
308. ter Note 160 MWExample of an Exclusive Message and Calculating a Checksum Roland Exclusive messages RQ1 DT1 are transmitted with a checksum at the end before F7 to make sure that the message was correctly received The value of the checksum is determined by the address and data or size of the transmitted Exclusive message How to calculate the checksum hexadecimal numbers are indicated by H The checksum is a value derived by adding the address size and checksum itself and inverting the lower 7 bits Here s an example of how the check sum is calculated We will assume that in the Exclusive message we are transmitting the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ffH aa bb cc dd ee ff sum sum 128 quotient remainder 128 remainder checksum lt Example1 gt Setting CHORUS TYPE to DELAY DT1 According to the Parameter Address Map p 153 the start address of Temporary Setup is 10 00 00 00H the offset address of CHORUS at Setup is 04 00H and the address of CHORUS TYPE is 00 00H Therefore the address of CHORUS TYPE of Setup is 10 00 00 00H 04 00H 00 00H 10 00 04 00H DELAY has the value of 02H So the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 00 43 12 10 00 04 00 02 22 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID RD 700 5 Command ID DT1 6 End of Exclusive
309. ter has three pitch shifters and can add three pitch shifted sounds to the direct sound Coarse 1 2 3 Coarse Pitch 1 2 3 Specify the pitch in semitones for pitch shift 1 3 Fine 1 2 3 Fine Pitch 1 2 3 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shift 1 3 in 2 cent steps PreDelay1 2 3 Pre Delay Time 1 2 3 Specify the time delay from the direct sound until the pitch shift 1 3 sound is heard Feedback1 2 3 Feedback Level 1 2 3 Adjust the proportion of the pitch shift 1 3 sound that is fed back into the effect Pan 1 2 3 Output Pan 1 2 3 Specify the stereo location of the pitch shift 1 3 sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 1 2 3 Level 1 2 3 Specify the volume of the pitch shift 1 3 Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of DO 100W the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Specifies the output volume 50 LOFI COMPRESS This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality Type LoFi Type Lowers the audio quality The audio quality will worsen as this setting is increased 119 gt o y 0 5 9 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List PreFilter
310. that is to be played back e You cannot switch to GM mode if the Edit screen s System settings or the Rx GM System ON Rx GM2 System ON or GS Reset settings are set to OFF For details refer to Switching Between Reception of GM GM2 System On and GS Reset p 70 Playing Back GM Scores l Connect an external sequencer See p 97 2 Play back the GM Score with the external sequencer Playback of the GM Score begins and the following GM Mode screen is displayed on the RD 700 42126 End Part 1 GH Bel Piano 1 A a s 7 Ame SETUP IIExit When you play the RD 700 s keyboard you can then perform using the Tone for the currently selected Part Changing the tone of a specific part 1 Inthe GM Mode screen press the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor to the Part number 2 Press DEC NO or INC YES to select the Part whose Tone is to be changed 3 Press CURSOR b to move the cursor to the Tone number 4 Press DEC NO or INC YES to select the tone The specified Part is played using the selected Tone Muting a Specific Part 1 Inthe GM Mode screen use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor to the marker for the Part to be muted 2 Press DEC NO or INC YES to select whether the mute is turned on or off MIDI messages are received The perfor mance is played back according to the MIDI messages MIDI messages are not received This Part is muted You can perfo
311. the Current Tone Even When Tones Are Switched Tone Remain This setting specifies whether the currently heard sound will continue ON or not OFF when another tone is selected Parameter Value Tone Remain OFF ON Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new Tone without being influenced by the Tone Remain setting Because of this certain effects settings can cause notes that were until then sounding to no longer be heard even though Tone Remain has been set to on Changing the Clock Timing Source Clock Source You can control the tempo from an external MIDI device Set this to MIDI when synchronizing to the clock tempo of an external MIDI device Synchronized to the internal clock Clock Synchronized to the external S MIDI device s clock ource MIDI The tempo indication 41 changes to M for each screen MEM Internal tempo settings are made in the Tone screen p 32 the Rhythm Edit screen p 82 and the Arpeggio Edit Screen p 83 The tempo cannot be set if Clock Source is set to MIDI without there being any external MIDI device connected This can result in arpeggios p 49 and Rhythms p 51 not sounding and may change the manner in which certain effects are applied Switching Between Reception of GM GM2 System On and GS Reset Specifies whether General MIDI System On General MIDI 2 System On or GS Reset messages from external MIDI devices will be rec
312. the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right PreDelayA Pre Delay Time A Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Coarse B Coarse Pitch B 2 Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine B Fine Pitch B 2 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pan B Output Pan B Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right PreDelayB Pre Delay Time B Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Level Bal Level Balance Adjust the volume balance between the Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds When set to A100 0B only the sound of Pitch Shift A is output when set to A0 100B only the sound of Pitch Shift B is output Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be fed back into the effect Coarse Coarse Pitch
313. the RD 700 and all devices connected to it Refer to the following illustration of the RD 700 s rear panel and remove the screws indicated Then remove the cover j Screws to be removed Insert the Wave Expansion Board connector into a connector for an SRX Series slot SRX A or SRX B while simultaneously inserting the board holders into the holes in the Wave Expansion Board Wave Expansion Board SRX series If the same type of Wave Expansion Board is installed in the SRX A slot and the SRX B slot it will SL _ P only be possible to select PRA a data from the Wave AE Sa ae Expansion Board that was Position them as shown installed in the SRX A slot before you install the board Connector ee QO Board holder Getting Ready 4 Use the Installation Tool supplied with the Wave Expansion Board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction so the board will be fastened in place Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt 9 Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fasten the cover back in place Getting Ready Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards has been completed check MEMO to confirm that the installed boards are being recognized correctly For instructions on selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones refer to Selecting Wave Expansion Board Tones EQUALIZER s O T O KEYBOARD CONTROL EXPANSION FUNCTION MID HIGH ARPEG
314. the TONE SELECT buttons you can specify groups of ten Setups ata time l Press SETUP getting the indicator to light At this time turn NUM LOCK off 2 Use the TONE SELECT buttons to specify the Setup number Setups are assigned to the TONE SELECT buttons as shown below TONE SELECT CLAV BRASS VOICE PIANO E PIANO MALLET O S WIND o o o N RGAN STRINGS PAD GTR BAS N SYNTH 000 000 co 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 60 660 000 000 000 000 000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 001 011 021 031 041 051 061 071 081 091 RHY GM2 ooo 000 000 9 SETUP 2 amp wf Z s Number 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 Press DEC NO or INC YES to select the Setup When INC YES or DEC NO is pressed the TONE SELECT buttons included in the selected Setup numbers flash and the following screen appears az SETUP RHY Reb RAYS Funk RHY Por RHY Rock 1 Either press the flashing TONE SELECT button or play the keyboard The TONE SELECT button stops flashing and remains lit and the selected Setup is set A O lt O 2 O mi A O un 55 Using the Convenient Functions in Performances Storing Settings to Setups WRITE When the contents of a Setup are changed an asterisk a mark appears on the right of the tempo indication If you want to use the changed content as a new Setup use the following procedure to save the settings to a Setup You can
315. the Transposition for Each Individual Part Key Transpose 88 Turning the Controllers in Each Part On and Off ica 89 Assigning Internal Parts to Local Parts Part Assign ss 89 Setting MIDI Receive Parts Internal Part Prm 89 Howto Make Detinne Separe a a a T T 89 pelechine the Lart to Be Sel Pare LONE lts 90 Setting the Receive Channel Receive Channel 90 Setting the Volume and Pan Volume Pan uu 90 Making the Effect ON OFF Settings MEX Switch ss 90 Setting the Required Polyphony Voice Reserve ss 90 Setting Reception and Blocking of MIDI Messages from External MIDI Controllers 91 Setting the Tuning Method Temperament Key a 91 Other Functions UH ini A 92 Transferring the RD 700 s Settings to an External MIDI Device Bulk Dump 92 Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset 94 Connecting External MIDI Devices T 95 Recording RD 700 Performances to an External MIDI Sequencer ss 95 Contectine to an External Sequencer str a 95 Settings TOP Recordine Re Seting ses ee 95 Recordin the Perio mae e ies ia toa 96 ADOUt Ee Local SW adas 96 Playing the RD 700 s Internal Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device
316. the tempo and use this as a Samba pieles Hold Depending on the Style settings p 84 some choices may SALSA not be available For details on the possible values refer to Style 3 4 notes for best results Arpeggio Style List p 142 Typical mambo style results Notes you press will be sounded i SINGLE ayasa individually beginning from low in percussion instru UP to high LATIN PERC ments such as Clave Cowbell Clap Bongo SINGLE Notes you press will be sounded Conga Agogo etc DOWN individually beginning from high to low Typical samba style Use SAMBA for rhythm patterns or SINGLE Notes you press will be sounded pace nes UP amp individually from low to high and then back down from high to Typical tango rhythm DOWN jose style Hold the root 3rd TANGO a thor a wad eto for SINGLE Notes you press will be sounded best results RANDOM individually in random order A style for house piano Notes you press will be sounded HOUSE backing Hold 3 4 notes DUAL UP twoata time beginning from low for best results to high The settings of all param DUAL Notes Ta press w be sounded LIMITLESS eters can be freely com DOWN two ata time beginning from high bined without restriction to low POW HPI 85 Q LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT k Notes you press will be sounded DUAL UP amp DOWN low DUAL Notes you press will be sounded RAND
317. the unit in a wet area such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture e Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance e For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth e Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional Precautions e Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a Sequencer e Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data e Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions e Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display
318. ting in Edit mode the RHY RHYTHM MIDI TX screen as shown to the left is not displayed Set Rec Mode to OFF when setting the MIDI Transmit channel p 95 Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard Selecting Sounds on an External MIDI Device To switch the tones of an external MIDI device the program number and the MSB LSB of the Bank Select message are entered as numerical values on the RD 700 VOLUME EQUALIZER KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPANSION FUNCTION LO Al WO O MD HIGH OOOO ON OFF RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 REVERB J CHORUS a EFFECTS TONE SELECT Sos PART SWITCH LEVEL ONE TOUCH Press MIDI TX getting the indicator to light If MSB doesn t appear on screen press CURSOR d several times to display the following screen MIDI Tx Ch MSE LSE PC L L soja MSB Bank Select MSB CC 32 0 127 OFF pee 9 Program number or a Bank LSB Bank Select LSB CC 00 0 127 OFF eben touch n n Tone lt PC Program Change Program Change 0 127 OFF has been assigned an 9 alternate Tone may be z selected or in some cases 2 there may be no sound Press CURSOR 4 A J P or w to move the cursor I L ou cO moi wern to transmit the Program then press INC YES or DEC NO to set the MSB LSB and 5 Locle PC for each part the procedure described left to set the PC MSB LSB Pressing INC YES and DEC NO simultaneously switches the
319. ting the Key Range for each Local Part ee EDIT Local Part Param Key Range p 47 80 67 80 47 80 78 77 80 77 90 89 74 73 88 MEMO 169 Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD El Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd GUANGZHOU OFFICE 2 F No 30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang Wu Yang Xin Cheng Guangzhou 510600 CHINA Tel 020 8736 0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Divis
320. ting will be cut 123 gt o y 0 5 9 A A n O om ne c Q Q Q lt Effect Parameter List Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter StpRateSw Step Rate Switch Determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF Step Rate Adjust the rate at which the pitch will change gt Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear the output sound The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 62 TREMOLO Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Mod Wave Modulation Wave TRI The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave SQR
321. tion orienter les supports a carte tel qu indiqu sur le sch ma Connecteur 20 Getting Ready French language for Canadian Safety Standard 4 Pour tourner les supports en position LOCK verrouill utilisez l outil d installation de la carte d extension fournie cet effet De cette facon la carte sera bien fix e a sa place Outil d installation Reposez le couvercle en remettant les vis enlev es comme sp cifi l tape 2 5 V rification des cartes d extension audio apr s installation Lorsque l installation des cartes d extension audio est termin e proc der a une v rification pour s assurer que l ordinateur les identifie correctement ZN EQUALIZER EXPANSION FUNCTION MID HIGH O O O O ARPEGGIO TRANSPOSE ZS ON OFF RHYTHM LOWER UPPER 2 UPPER 1 LOWER UPPER2 UPPER 1 EDIT WRITE MIDITX NUM LOCK ToO El QU D MOM Wry OMe z SPLIT LAYER QS PP L DEMO PLAY J REVERB ET ma x TO E SELECT Ss PIANO SET UP T ANO E PIANO MALLET ORGAN STRI PAD GTR BASS RRA NTH RH P Be Gee ele Q 0 5 7 0 Q o x lt AED GE ON OFF OOO O Oriitittl ONE TOUCH Mettre sous tension de la facon d crite sous Turning On the Power p 24 Tenez EXPANSION A ou B enfonc pendant plusieurs O est affich c t du nom de la fente secondes dans laquelle la carte est install e il est possible que ExPansion Board Info E i ee ee ea
322. tion of the POWER switch on the back of the RD 700 The power is switched off POWER ON OE Adjusting the Volume 1 VOLUME Adjust the volume using the VOLUME slider Move the slider up to increase the volume or down to lower it Also adjust the volume of the connected device to an appropriate level 25 Q 0 3 7 0 Q o x lt Getting Ready Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset When using the RD 700 for the first time start by returning the settings to their factory defaults so that the RD 700 operates as described in the Executing this operation procedures in the owner s manual deletes the Setup settings p 54 If you want to keep any internally stored content use the Bulk Dump Bulk Dump Never turn off the power during Factory Reset while Now SETUP procedure to save Executing appears in the display the data to an external sequencer p 92 Turning off the power while Factory Reset is in progress may result in corrupted internal data and may prevent the power from being turned on again If you have confirmed that the internal data has been lost or if a similar problem exists consult the retailer from whom you purchased the instrument or the nearest Roland Service Center Note however that Roland assumes no liability including compensation for consequences arising from any loss of data Getting Ready KEYBOARD CONTROL PART SELECT EXPA
323. trol i change message ffH Data These messages are not transmitted when MIDI Tx Parameter is OFF sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and BnH 00H mmH data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address BnH 20H 11H and size given in Parameter Address Map p 153 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each mm ll Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Regarding the checksum please refer to p 160 When Rec Mode is ON EDIT Utility Rec Setting Rec Mode these messages are Not Received when the GM Mode is ON transmitted when Tone is selected These messages are transmitted when Bank Select parameter is Set on MIDI Tx Part OData set 1DT1 GM Mode The Bank Select Numbers corresponding to SRX series should be referred to the SRX Status Data byte Status series owner s manual FOH 41H dev 42H 12H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH eeH sum OModulation Controller number 1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte Byte Explanation BnH 01H vvH FOH Exclusive status n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 41H ID number Roland vv Modulation depth OOH 7FH 0 127 dev Device ID dev 10H 42H Model ID
324. ume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte ONote off BnH 07H vvH Status 2nd byte 3rd byte n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 8nH kkH vvH vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 9nH kkH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Not received when the Rx Volume EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Volume is OFF Le Snore number 00H 7FH 0 127 The Part Level parameter will change vv note off velocity 00H 7FH 0 127 OPanpot Controller number 10 Some instruments are not received in Rhythm set Status 2nd byte Srd byte The velocity values of Note Off messages are ignored BnH OAH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 ONote on vv Panpot 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH Not received when the Rx Pan EDIT Internal Part Parameter Rx Pan is OFF Abe OHS FE ich 1 16 The pan parameter EDIT Internal Part Parameter Pan will change kk not ber OOH 7FH 0 127 TA OExpression Controller number 11 vv note on velocity 01H 7FH 1 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte OControl Change ae oe qa E sC ii erae et rs n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 the corresponding Controller number is selected for the Control Source parameter vv Expression 00H 7FH 0 127 EDIT CONTROL EQ 5rc the corresponding effect will occur O General Purpose Controller 1 Controller number 16 OBank Select Controller number 0 32 p
325. ural length Type Gated Reverb Type Select the type of reverb NORMAL conventional gate reverb REVERSE backwards reverb SWEEP1 the reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right Pre Delay Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard Gate Time Adjust the time from when the reverb is heard until when it disappears Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 26 OD gt CHORUS Overdrive gt Chorus This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Cho Delay Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard
326. urch Warm OrgPad Slicing Svox Slicing Pad Cultivate Bell Pad Heirbone RD RandomBellPd Glassy Pad Air Pad SpaceVox Pad Nylon amp Str Jazz Combo SearingLd Bs Gtr Lead Org SynthLead Bs West Coast Harpsi amp Gtr Nylon Rhodes Yang Qin 3 Finger Orch Brass Flute Harp Brs amp Str Orch Flute String SopSax Str Soft SynBrs Big Band Fr Horn Sect Synth Brass PsychoRhodes No 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 Setup Name Scat Vox Air Piano Jazz Scat Glass Voices Poly SynSaw Humaniser Synth Stack E Piano Scat Tubular Vox Techno Combo Warm Pno Pad Groove EP Pno Stage EP 12Str Beauty Organ Layer Killer Brass 2Phazed Pno Talking Stab Sop Vibes EP Glass Rhodes You can easily change settings for the following functions using a number of related buttons LA B indicates that you are to hold down A and press B Changing Transpose setting TRANSPOSE Key Changing the Keyboard s Split Point SPLIT Key Changing the MFX Source MULTI EFFECTS ON OFF PART SWITCH tido Reverb Chorus Amount for L ART SWITCH REVERB or CHORUS knob You can easily call up Edit screens for related parameters for the following functions by holding down EDIT while pressing buttons turning knobs or operating other controllers aaa bbb indicates the bbb parameter in Edit screen aaa Dd the Pedal s Po EDIT Damper System Damper P
327. ve MG Square 2600 Sine MSB 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 LSB 001 002 003 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 000 000 001 002 000 000 001 000 000 001 000 001 000 001 000 001 002 003 000 001 000 001 002 000 000 001 000 001 000 001 000 001 002 003 000 001 002 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 002 PC 040 040 040 041 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 047 048 049 049 049 050 051 051 052 053 053 054 054 055 055 056 056 056 056 057 057 058 058 058 059 060 060 061 061 062 062 063 063 063 063 064 064 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 081 081 No 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 Tone Name Saw Wave OB2 Saw Doctor Solo Natural Lead SequencedSaw Syn
328. ve Expansion Board Installation Slot 14 PARITE asia ads 56 167 Purpose Oriented Index This index lists the main setting items relevant to play of the RD 700 s keyboard Edit aaa bbb indicates the bbb parameter in Edit screen aaa Volume Setting Changing the Volume for the entire RD 700 Se VOLUME Slider p EEE nr EDIT System Master Volume p Changing the volume for Individual Local Parts A ree PART LEVEL Slider p Changing the volume for each Internal Part en a none EDIT Internal Part Prm Volume p Key Touch and Velocity Changing the key touch EDIT Key Touch p Changing the value of velocity for each Local Part e EDIT Local Part Param Velocity Sens p PA EDIT Local Part Param Velocity Max p Equalizer Preventing equalizer settings from being switched ENE EAE E as EDIT System EQ Control Setting the Equalizer EQUALIZER knob D ten EDIT Control EQ A aun ox caus de PIANO EDIT EQ et Pitch and Tuning Changing the pitch for the entire RD 700 ne EDIT System Master Tune p Transposing the entire keyboard TRNSPOSE p Changing the pitch for each Tone An EDIT Tone Edit Coarse Tune p IAN EDIT Tone Edit Fine Tune p nn nn A EDIT Tone Edit Stretch Tune p Changing the pitch for each Local Part dana EDIT Local Part Param Key Transpose p Changing the temperament fo
329. vv 3 Chorus4 vv 4 FB Chorus vv 5 Flanger pp 1 Mod Rate vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 2 Mod Depth vv 00H 7FH 0 127 149 gt D D 0 2 A un N Q om ne c Q Q Q lt MIDI Implementation F7H pp 3 Feedback vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 4 Send To Reverb vv 00H 7FH 0 127 EOX End Of Exclusive OChannel Pressure Status F7H OController Status F7H Data byte Status 7FH 7FH 09H 01H OnH ppH rrH F7H Explanation Exclusive status ID number universal realtime message Device ID Broadcast Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting Sub ID 2 Channel Pressure MIDI Channel 00 OF Controlled parameter Controlled range pp 0 Pitch Control rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones pp 1 Filter Cutoff Control rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents pp 2 Amplitude Control rr 00H 7FH 0 200 pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents pp 4 LFO Filter Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth rr 00H 7FH 0 100 EOX End Of Exclusive Data byte Status 7FH 7FH 09H 03H OnH ccH ppH rrH F7H Explanation Exclusive status ID number universal realtime message Device ID Broadcast Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting Sub ID 2 Control Change MIDI Channel 00 OF Controller number 01 1F 40 5F Controlled parameter Controlled range pp 0 Pitch Control rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones pp 1 Filter
330. when the GM Mode is ON MIDI Implementation OData set 1DT1 2 Data Transmission This is the message that actually performs data transmission and is used when you wish to transmit the data EChannel Voice Messages Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 43H 12H aaH bbH F7H ONote off ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH 40H Byte Explanation n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 FOH Exclusive status kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 7FH Initial value is 10H Note off message is sent out with the velocity of 40H 00H Model ID 1 RD 700 43H Model ID 2 RD 700 Note on 12H Command ID DT1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent 9nH kkH vvH bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 sent kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be vv note on velocity 01H 7FH 1 127 sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent Control Chan ge eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted By selecting a controller number that corresponds to the setting of parameters of in order starting from the address controllers Control Src Foot Controller Assign the RD 700 can transmit any con
331. x 24 0000 000a Rx Bank Select LSB 0 1 40 2x 40 Daaa aaaa CC1 Pitch Control 40 88 OFF ON 24 24 semitone 40 2x 41 Daaa aaaa CC1 TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 40 1x 30 aaa aaaa Tone Modify 1 Vibrato Rate 0 127 9600 9600 cent 64 63 40 2x 42 0Oaaa aaaa CC1 Amplitude Control 0 127 40 1x 31 Qaaa aaaa Tone Modify 2 Vibrato Depth 0 127 100 0 100 0 64 63 40 2x 43 Daaa aaaa CC1 LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 40 1x 32 Qaaa aaaa Tone Modify 3 TVF Cutoff Freq 0 127 10 0 10 0 Hz 64 63 40 2x 44 Daaa aaaa CC1 LFO1 Pitch Control 0 127 40 1x 33 Daaa aaaa Tone Modify 4 TVF Resonance 0 127 0 600 cent 64 63 40 2x 45 aaa aaaa CC1 LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 40 1x 34 Qaaa aaaa Tone Modify 5 TVF amp TVA Env Attack 0 127 0 2400 cent 64 63 40 2x 46 aaa aaaa CC1 LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 40 1x 35 Qaaa aaaa Tone Modify 6 TVF amp TVA Env Decay 0 127 O 100 0 3 64 63 40 2x 47 Daaa aaaa CC1 LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 40 1x 36 Qaaa aaaa Tone Modify 7 TVF amp TVA ENv Release 0 127 10 0 10 0 Hz 64 63 40 2x 48 Daaa aaaa CC1 LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 40 1x 37 Daaa aaaa Tone Modify 8 Vibrato Delay 0 127 0 600 cent 64 63 40 2x 49 Qaaa aaaa CC1 LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 0 2400 cent 40 1x 40 Qaaa aaaa Scale Tuning C 0 127 40 2x 4A Qaaa aaaa CC1 L
332. y not be restored correctly Data cannot be received if the Device ID of the receiving device differs from the Device ID used when Bulk Dump was carried out Exclusive messages cannot be received when set to GM Mode p 98 Carry out the operation after first exiting GM Mode 93 m o o 0 O 3 Q om LLJ Detailed Settings for Each Function EDIT Restoring the settings to the factory condition Factory Reset The settings stored in the RD 700 can be returned to their factory settings Executing Factory Reset All results in deletion of the Setups p 54 If you want to keep any data you have stored use the Bulk Dump SETUP operation to save the data to an external sequencer p 92 l Press EDIT getting the indicator to light The Edit Menu screen appears EDIT MENU k Da hath Pattern E AFFe3310 T Local Part Param Internal Part Prem 3 Uti lit 2 Press CURSOR W to select 9 Utility 3 Press CURSOR gt to display the Edit screen EDIT CULilityd Rec Settins Bulk Dune TenPorara Bulk Dume SETUP Factory Reset Curren Factory Reset All 4 Press CURSOR amp J or W to select Factory Reset Current or Factory Reset All Parameter Value Factory Reset Thecurrently selected Setup returned to Current their factory settings Factory Reset The settings stored in the RD 700 can be All returned to th
333. ystem settings are saved each time one of these parameters is changed Setup lt 000 gt When you press the ONE TOUCH PIANO button and then press CURSOR or SETUP to bring up the Setup screen SETUP lt 000 gt is displayed This Setup lt 000 gt is called Piano Setup 21787 SETUP mm a St Concert SIMGLE This SETUP lt 000 gt is the Setup containing the stored settings for ONE TOUCH PIANO the contents cannot be overwritten by pressing the WRITE button as with other Setups When saving content changed from the ONE TOUCH PIANO settings write the settings to SETUP lt 001 gt or later n E Q c Lin s 2 c 0 gt Le U 58 Using the RD 700 As a Master Keyboard By connecting an external MIDI device to the MIDI OUT connector on the RD 700 s rear panel you can then control the external MIDI device with the RD 700 Normally the RD 700 transmits Note messages from the MIDI OUT connector but when MIDI TX is on you can control not only Note messages but a variety of other external MIDI device settings as well You can control internal and external sound generators independently What s MIDI MIDI Musical Instruments Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows musical data to be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers By using a MIDI cable to connect devices that have MIDI connectors you can create an ensemble in which
334. ze 00 04 Daaa aaaa keyboard Transpose 16 112 48 48 OSetup Internal Part 00 05 0000 000a Part Switch 0 1 OFF ON Offset 00 06 0000 000a Damper Switch 0 1 Address Description OFF ON 00 07 0000 000a FCI Switch 0 1 00 00 0000 aaaa Receive Channel 0 15 OFF ON 1 16 00 08 0000 000a FC2 Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 01 Daaa aaaa Patch Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 09 0000 000a odulation Switch 0 1 00 02 aaa aaaa Patch Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 OFF ON 00 03 Daaa aaaa Patch Program Change 0 127 00 OA 0000 000a Bender Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 04 aaa aaaa Part Level CC 7 0 127 00 0B 0000 000a Control Switch 0 1 00 05 Daaa aaaa Part Pan CC 10 1 127 OFF ON L63 63R 00 OC 0000 aaaa Local Part Assign 0 15 00 06 0000 000a Part MFX Switch 0 1 1 16 OFF ON 00 00 00 0D Total Size 00 07 0000 Oaaa Temperament Type CO 00 08 0000 aaaa Temperament Key 0 11 C C Bb B OSetup MIDI Tx Part 00 09 0000 000a Receive Bank Select Switch 0 13 OFF O offset 00 0A 0000 000a Receive Program Change Switch r go Address Pe das 00 OB 0000 000a Receive Bender Switch 0 1 OFF O A paqa sadad Keybgard Range Lower ee s 00 OC 0000 000a Receive Modulation Switch ni z FF ee Daas asa Keyboard Range upper Fr a 00 OD 0000 000a Receive Volume Switch 0 1 E OFF O 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Velocity Sensitivity 1 127 00
335. zi ez4 O X HO SSJON IV soBesson X X HO UO e907 xny O X si ljodnuoo IV 1 s ti 231 9ZL 031 O X HO punos IIV X O spuewwop sul 294 Ly O x 19019 uajs s e o EE sha X X o9 S Buos Weajs s X X uonisoy Buos 8Z1 1 ON Wesbold 2 0 a JOqUINN en Bueuo O O uei6ol4 GSW gsl Ndy O O LOL O0 GSW gsl NdEN X X 66 36 O1U0 XAIN O O S6 LE 1 2 1 19 101JU0 1004 O O s6 Le 1 J9seud Gx O Gx O 96 91S9 9O S O Gx O v6 sjoaya esodind jeieuer sniou9 O O 6 O OUIU 1 S O Gx O z6 S199JJ9 osodind jelous Q19A9H O O L6 OJJUOD OJUSUIBLOJ Gx O Gx O v8 8 1911011009 sodind eJauac G O S O 8 Z 19 01Ju09 sodind eJauac G O S O c8 9 19 01JU09 sodind eJauacr G O G O 18 G 19 01Ju09 sodind eJauacr G O S O 08 Aejep oje1qIA Vx O Gx O 824 uidep oleiq A Vx O S O ZZ 9 e1 OJEIGI A Vx O Gx O 92 aun edaq Vx O Gx O SZ Honno O O vZ OUI 19eny O O Z Owl 9seajay O O lt 163 Main Specifications RD 700 Digital Piano Conforms to General MIDI 2 System O Keyboard 88 keys Progressive Hammer Action Keyboard O Part 16 O Maximum Polyphony 128 voices O Wave Memory 64 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent O Expansion Slot Wave Expansion Board SRX Series 2 slots 1 O Tones 468 Normal Tones 189 Tone Wheel Organ 10 General MIDI 2 Tones 256 Rhythm Sets 4 General MIDI 2 Rhythm S

Roland RD-700 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents